Chevrolet Cruze 2012 Manual - en PDF

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)
2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Performance and Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Keys, Doors, and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Additional Storage Trademarks and License
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-34
2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-29 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Vehicle Data Recording and
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-42 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
Conversions and General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
and vehicle body designs appearing the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo, substitute the name “General
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
Emblem, and CRUZE are Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
trademarks and/or service marks Detroit, MI 48207
it appears in this manual.
of General Motors LLC, its 1-800-551-4123
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
quick reference. française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20935335 A First Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it
hazard that could result in injury is a safety symbol which means
or death. “Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart " : Charging System * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Here are some additional symbols I : Cruise Control : : Oil Pressure
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more B : Engine Coolant Temperature } : Power
information on the symbol, refer to O : Exterior Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
the Index.
# : Fog Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders
9 : Airbag Readiness Light . : Fuel Gauge 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
# : Air Conditioning + : Fuses d : Traction Control/Stabilitrak®
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam M : Windshield Washer Fluid
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls Changer
or OnStar
j : LATCH System Child
$: Brake System Warning Light Restraints
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Steering Wheel

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Tire Sealant and
Initial Drive Information Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Vehicle Features Driving for Better Fuel
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roadside Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Driver Information
Passenger Sensing Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
In Brief 1-3
A. Exterior Lamp Controls on H. Windshield Wiper/Washer on R. Steering Wheel Adjustment on

page 6‑1. page 5‑3. page 5‑2.
Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4 I. Infotainment on page 7‑2. S. Driver Airbag. See Where Are
(If Equipped). Satellite Radio on page 7‑14 the Airbags? on page 3‑21.
Instrument Panel Illumination (If Equipped). T. Ignition Switch or Keyless
Control on page 6‑5. J. Infotainment Display Screen. Ignition Button (If Equipped).
B. Air Vents on page 8‑6. See Ignition Positions (Key
K. Instrument Panel Storage on Access) on page 9‑15 or
C. Headlamp High/Low-Beam page 4‑1. Ignition Positions (Keyless
Changer on page 6‑2. L. Light Sensor. See Automatic Access) on page 9‑18.
Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Headlamp System on page 6‑3. U. Driver Knee Airbag. See Where
See Turn and Lane-Change M. Passenger Airbag. See Where Are the Airbags? on page 3‑21.
Signals on page 6‑4. Are the Airbags? on page 3‑21. V. Power Door Locks on
Driver Information Center (DIC) N. Hood Release. See Hood on page 2‑11.
Buttons. See Driver Information page 10‑4.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑23. W. Hazard Warning Flashers on
O. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 6‑3.
D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8. (Out of View). See Malfunction X. Shift Lever. See Automatic
E. Horn on page 5‑3. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑13. Transmission on page 9‑29 or
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) P. Instrument Panel Fuse Block on Manual Transmission on
on page 5‑23. page 10‑40. page 9‑33.
G. Steering Wheel Controls on Q. Cruise Control on page 9‑40. Y. Traction Control System (TCS)
page 5‑2. on page 9‑37.
StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑38.
1-4 In Brief
Z. Climate Control Systems on Initial Drive

page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
Automatic Climate Control
Information
System on page 8‑3 This section provides a brief
(If Equipped). overview about some of the
Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7 important features that may or may
(If Equipped). not be on your specific vehicle.
AA. Passenger Airbag Status For more detailed information, refer

Indicator on page 5‑12. to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
AB. Passenger Knee Airbag. See
Where Are the Airbags? on Remote Keyless Entry
page 3‑21. RKE Transmitter with Remote
(RKE) System Start Shown
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press the key release button to
transmitter will work up to 20 m extend the key blade. The key can
(65 ft) away from the vehicle. be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press K to unlock the driver door or
all doors.
Press Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑34.
In Brief 1-5
Press and hold V briefly to open Remote Vehicle Start The engine will continue to run for
the trunk. 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
For vehicles with this feature, the 10-minute time extension. Remote
Press and hold 7 briefly to locate engine can be started from outside start can be extended only once.
the vehicle. the vehicle.
Canceling a Remote Start
Press and hold 7 for at least Starting the Vehicle
To cancel a remote start, do one of
two seconds to sound the 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the following:
panic alarm. the vehicle.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at
Press 7 again to cancel the 2. Press and release Q. the vehicle and press and
panic alarm. hold / until the parking lamps
3. Immediately after completing
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote Step 2, press and hold / until turn off.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System the turn signal lamps flash, or for . Turn on the hazard warning
Operation on page 2‑3. about two seconds if the vehicle flashers.
is not in view. . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
When the engine starts, the parking See Remote Vehicle Start on
lamps will turn on and remain on as page 2‑9.
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
1-6 In Brief
Door Locks Power Door Locks

To lock or unlock the vehicle from
outside, use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key.
From inside the vehicle, use the
power door lock switch.
See Door Locks on page 2‑10.
Press o { to activate the safety

locks on the rear doors. The LED
The power door lock switch is on light (A) comes on when activated.
the instrument panel.
The rear door power windows are
K: Press to unlock the doors. also disabled.
Q: Press to lock the doors. Press o { again to deactivate the
See Power Door Locks on lockout switch.
page 2‑11.
If the LED light flashes, the feature
Safety Locks may not be working properly.
The rear door safety locks prevent See Safety Locks on page 2‑12.
passengers from opening the rear
doors from inside the vehicle.
In Brief 1-7
Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Seat Cushion Tilt Feature
Manual Front Seats
Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,

If available, move the lever up or Four-Way Similar
down to manually raise or lower
To adjust a manual seat: the seat. If available, move the lever up or
down to raise or lower the front of
1. Pull the handle at the front of the seat cushion.
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back
and forth to be sure it is
locked in place.
1-8 In Brief
Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an To adjust a power driver seat,

upright position: if equipped:
1. Lift the lever fully without . Move the seat forward or
applying pressure to the rearward by sliding the control
seatback, and the seatback forward or rearward.
returns to the upright position. . Raise or lower the front part of
2. Push and pull on the seatback to the seat cushion by moving the
make sure it is locked. front of the control up or down.
See Reclining Seatbacks on . Raise or lower the entire seat by
page 3‑5. moving the rear of the control up
or down.
Power Driver Seat
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
To recline the seatback:
Rear Seats
1. Lift the lever.
The rear seatbacks can be folded.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release For detailed instructions, see Rear
the lever to lock the seatback Seats on page 3‑8.
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
In Brief 1-9
Heated Seats and then the off setting. Three lights Safety Belts
indicate the highest setting and
one light the lowest.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑7 for more information.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
On vehicles with heated front seats, recline angle as little as necessary Refer to the following sections for
the controls are on the center while keeping the seat and the important information on how to
console. The engine must be head restraint height in the use safety belts properly:
running to operate the heated seats. proper position. . Safety Belts on page 3‑10.
Press L or M to heat the driver For more information see Head . How to Wear Safety Belts
or passenger seat cushion and Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Properly on page 3‑11.
seatback. Adjustment on page 3‑3.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑12.
Press the control once for the
highest setting. With each press of
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
the control, the heated seat will
page 3‑41.
change to the next lower setting,
1-10 In Brief
Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status 2. Move the control to adjust
indicator will be visible on the the mirror.
System instrument panel when the vehicle is 3. Turn the selector switch to the
started. See Passenger Airbag O position to deselect the mirror.
Status Indicator on page 5‑12.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Mirror Adjustment If the vehicle has heated mirrors,
see Heated Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Exterior
United States
Canada
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions. Vehicles with a manual mirror
No other airbag is affected by the Controls for the outside power adjustment have controls next to
passenger sensing system. See mirrors are on the driver door. each mirror.
Passenger Sensing System on 1. Turn the selector switch to
page 3‑26 for important information. See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑16.
L (left) or R (right) to choose
the driver or passenger mirror.
In Brief 1-11
Interior Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Adjust the inside rearview mirror by Adjustment Dome Lamps
moving it up and down or side to
side. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare
from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑17.
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. The dimming feature and
indicator light come on each time
the vehicle is started. To adjust the steering wheel: The dome lamp controls are located
See Automatic Dimming Rearview 1. Pull the lever (A) down. in the headliner.
Mirror on page 2‑17. 2. Move the steering wheel up (: Press to turn the lamps off,
or down. even when a door is open.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel H : Press to turn the lamps on
closer or away from you. automatically when a door is
opened.
4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place. ' : Press to turn on the
dome lamps.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
1-12 In Brief
Reading Lamps Instrument Panel Illumination Exterior Lighting

Control
The reading lamps are located in The exterior lamps control is located
the overhead console. This feature controls the brightness on the instrument panel to the
# or $ : Press the button near of the instrument panel controls and outboard side of the steering
each lamp to turn it on or off. infotainment display screen. The column.
thumbwheel is located to the left of
the steering column on the O : Briefly turn to this position to
instrument panel. turn the automatic light control off or
on again.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel AUTO: Turns the headlamps on
up or down and hold, to brighten or automatically at normal brightness,
dim the instrument panel controls together with the parking lamps,
and infotainment display screen. taillamps, license plate lamps,
sidemarker lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
In Brief 1-13
; : Turns on the parking lamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer

taillamps, license plate lamps,
sidemarker lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
5 : Turns on the headlamps,
parking lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, sidemarker lamps, and
instrument panel lights. A warning 3 : Turn the band up for more
chime sounds if the driver door is frequent wipes or down for less
The windshield wiper lever is on the frequent wipes.
opened when the ignition switch is side of the steering column. With
off and the headlamps are on. the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or 9 : Turns the windshield
#: For vehicles with fog lamps, ON/RUN, move the windshield wipers off.
press to turn the lamps on or off. wiper lever to select the wiper 3 : Briefly move the wiper lever
speed. down for a single wipe or hold down
For more information, see:
2: Fast wipes. for several wipes.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1. 1: Slow wipes. Windshield Washer
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Pull the windshield wiper lever to
on page 6‑2. spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
1-14 In Brief
Climate Controls G. Rear Window Defogger G. Rear Window Defogger

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and H. Defog H. Recirculation
ventilation for the vehicle can be I. Defrost I. Defog
controlled with these systems.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning J. Air Conditioning
Vehicles without Air Conditioning K. Defrost
Automatic Climate Control System
A. Temperature Control
A. Temperature Control
B. Bi-level Air Mode
B. Bi-level Air Mode
C. Floor Air Mode A. Temperature Control
C. Floor Air Mode
D. Vent Air Mode B. Rear Window Defogger
D. Vent Air Mode
E. Fan Control C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
E. Fan Control
F. Driver and Passenger Heated D. Defrost
F. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped)
Seats (If Equipped) E. Fan Control
In Brief 1-15
F. Driver and Passenger Heated Transmission Vehicle Features

Seats (If Equipped)
Manual Mode
G. Power Radio(s)
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
H. Recirculation O : Press to turn the system on
the automatic transmission to be
I. MODE (Air Delivery Mode) shifted similar to a manual and off. Turn to increase or
transmission. decrease the volume.
J. AQS (Air Quality Sensor)
Electronic Range Select (ERS) BAND: Press to choose between
K. Air Conditioning FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
allows for the selection of a range
See Climate Control Systems on of gears. MENU: Turn to select radio
page 8‑1 or Automatic Climate
See Manual Mode on page 9‑31. stations. Press to select a menu.
Control System on page 8‑3
(If Equipped). Up‐Shift Light g: Press to seek the previous
station or track.
l : Press to seek the next station
or track.
Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save and
select favorite stations.
INFO: Press to show available
information about the current
If the vehicle has a manual station or track.
transmission, it will have an up-shift
light that indicates when to shift to For more information about these
the next higher gear for the best fuel and other radio features, see
economy. Operation on page 7‑6.
See Manual Transmission on
page 9‑33.
1-16 In Brief
Storing a Favorite Station 4. Press the MENU knob to select XM Satellite Radio Service
the next number.
Stations from all bands can be XM is a satellite radio service based
stored in the favorite lists in any 5. To save the time and return to in the 48 contiguous United States
order. Up to six stations can be the Time Settings menu, press and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
stored in each favorite page and the the BACK button at any time or satellite radio has a wide variety of
number of available favorite pages press the MENU knob after programming and commercial-free
can be set. adjusting the minutes. music, coast to coast, and in
To store the station to a position in digital-quality sound. A fee is
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
the list, press the corresponding required to receive the XM service.
1. Press the CONFIG button and
numeric button 1 to 6 until a beep For more information refer to:
select Time Settings.
is heard. . www.xmradio.com or call
2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
For more information, see “Storing a 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
Station as a Favorite” in AM-FM 3. Press the MENU knob to select . www.xmradio.ca or call
Radio on page 7‑12. the 12 hour or 24 hour display
1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
format.
Setting the Clock For more information, see Satellite
See Clock on page 5‑5.
Adjusting the Time Radio on page 7‑14.
The clock menu can be only be Satellite Radio

used with the radio on while in ON/ Vehicles with an XM™ sxatellite
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. radio tuner and a valid XM satellite
1. Press the CONFIG button and radio subscription can receive
select Time Settings. XM programming.
2. Select Set Time.
3. Turn the MENU knob to adjust
the highlighted number.
In Brief 1-17
Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Overview) on $ / i : Press to silence the

page 7‑23 or Bluetooth vehicle speakers only. Press again
Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm (Infotainment Controls) on to turn the sound on. For vehicles
(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Voice with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
port located in the center console. Recognition) on page 7‑29. press to reject an incoming call,
External devices such as iPods®,
or to end a current call.
laptop computers, MP3 players, Steering Wheel Controls
CD changers, and USB storage _ SRC ^ : Turn _ or ^ to select a
devices may be connected, radio band or audio source.
depending on the audio system.
Press _ or ^ to select the next or
For more information, see Auxiliary previous favorite radio station, CD,
Devices on page 7‑20. or MP3 track.
Press SRC to change between
Bluetooth® radio and CD or DVD.
The Bluetooth system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone + x −: Press + to increase or − to
to make and receive hands-free decrease the volume.
calls using the vehicle audio For more information, see Steering
system, microphone, and controls. Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle For vehicles with audio steering
Bluetooth system before it can be wheel controls, some audio controls
used in the vehicle. Not all phones can be adjusted at the steering
will support all functions. wheel.
b / g : Press to interact with the
available Bluetooth, OnStar,
or navigation system.
1-18 In Brief
Cruise Control *: Press to disengage cruise Driver Information

control without erasing the set Center (DIC)
speed from memory.
The DIC display is located in the
See Cruise Control on page 9‑40. center of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
Navigation System vehicle systems. The controls for
If the vehicle has a navigation the DIC are located on the turn
system, there is a separate signal lever.
navigation system manual that
includes information on the radio,
audio players, and navigation
system.
The navigation system provides
For vehicles with cruise control: detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
1 : Press to turn the cruise control destination has been set, the A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear
system on and off. system provides turn-by-turn the menu item when it is
RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel up instructions for reaching the displayed.
to resume a previously set speed or destination. In addition, the system B. w x: Use the thumbwheel to
to accelerate. can help locate a variety of points of scroll through the items in
interest (POIs), such as banks, each menu.
SET/− : Move the thumbwheel
airports, restaurants, and more.
down to set a speed or to make the
vehicle decelerate. See the navigation system manual
for more information.
In Brief 1-19
C. MENU: Press to display the Power Outlets Performance and

Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle
Information menu. This button is The accessory power outlets can be Maintenance
also used to return to or exit the used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
last screen displayed on Traction Control
the DIC. There is one accessory power outlet System (TCS)
For more information, see Driver located on the center floor console
Information Center (DIC) on and one on the rear of the center The traction control system limits
page 5‑23. floor console. These outlets are wheel spin. The system is on when
powered when the key is in ON/ the vehicle is started.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until . To turn off traction control, press
the driver door is opened within
If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking and release g located on the
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the See Retained Accessory Power console. i illuminates and the
rear bumper to detect objects while (RAP) on page 9‑23. appropriate DIC message
parking the vehicle. It operates at displays. See Vehicle Messages
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). (Canada Base Level) on
URPA uses audible beeps to page 5‑28 or Vehicle Messages
provide distance and system (Canada Uplevel and United
information. States) on page 5‑28.
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's . Press and release g again to
rear bumper clean to ensure proper turn traction control back on.
operation.
For more information, see Traction
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑42 for more information. page 9‑37.
1-20 In Brief
StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
The StabiliTrak system assists with This vehicle may have a Tire inflated to the proper pressure.
directional control of the vehicle in Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
difficult driving conditions. The The TPMS does not replace normal
system is on when the vehicle is monthly tire maintenance. It is the
started. driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
. To turn off both Traction Control
and StabiliTrak, press and See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑50.
hold g until g and i illuminate
and the appropriate DIC
message displays. See Vehicle The TPMS warning light alerts you Tire Sealant and
Messages (Canada Base Level) to a significant loss in pressure of Compressor Kit
on page 5‑28 or Vehicle one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as This vehicle may come with a spare
Messages (Canada Uplevel and tire and tire changing equipment or
United States) on page 5‑28. soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure a tire sealant and compressor kit.
. Press g again to turn on both shown on the Tire and Loading The kit can be used to temporarily
systems. Information label. See Vehicle Load seal small punctures in the tread
Limits on page 9‑10. The warning area of the tire.
For more information, see
light will remain on until the tire See Tire Sealant and Compressor
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑38.
pressure is corrected. Kit on page 10‑65 for complete
During cooler conditions, the low tire operating information.
pressure warning light may appear If the vehicle came with a spare tire
when the vehicle is first started and and tire changing equipment, see If
then turn off. This may be an early a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑63.
In Brief 1-21
. Avoid idling the engine for long
Engine Oil Life System 2. Press the SET button to reset
periods of time.
the oil life at 100%. When
The engine oil life system calculates prompted, use the thumbwheel . When road and weather
engine oil life based on vehicle use to highlight YES or NO. Press conditions are appropriate, use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE the SET/CLEAR button to cruise control.
OIL SOON DIC message or confirm.
Code 82 DIC message when it is . Always follow posted speed
necessary to change the engine oil Be careful not to reset the oil life limits or drive more slowly when
and filter. display accidentally at any time conditions require.
other than after the oil is changed.
Remember, the Oil Life display It cannot be reset accurately.
. Keep vehicle tires properly
must be reset after each oil change. inflated.
It will not reset itself. Also, be See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑12.
. Combine several trips into a
careful not to reset the Oil Life single trip.
display accidentally at break="2"
any time other than when the oil has Driving for Better Fuel . Replace the vehicle's tires with
just been changed. It cannot be Economy the same TPC Spec number
reset accurately until the next oil molded into the tire's sidewall
change. To reset the engine oil life Driving habits can affect fuel near the size.
system press the mileage. Here are some driving tips . Follow recommended scheduled
SET button while the Oil Life display to get the best fuel economy
maintenance.
is active. possible.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
Resetting the Oil Life System
smoothly.
1. Using the DIC MENU button and . Brake gradually and avoid
thumbwheel, scroll until you
abrupt stops.
reach REMAINING OIL LIFE on
the DIC (oil can symbol with
% sign for Canada).
1-22 In Brief
Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center Automatic Crash Response

Program The Online Owner Center is a In a crash, built‐in sensors
complimentary service that includes automatically alert an OnStar
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 online service reminders, vehicle Advisor who is immediately
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 maintenance tips, online owner connected to the vehicle to see
manual, special privileges, if you need help.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
and more.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, How OnStar Service Works
Sign up today at:
you are automatically enrolled in the
www.chevyownercenter.com Q : Push this blue button to
Roadside Assistance program. connect to a specially trained
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
See Roadside Assistance Program OnStar Advisor to verify your
account information and to
on page 13‑6 for more information. OnStar® answer questions.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
] : Push this red emergency
If you have an active OnStar button to get priority help from
subscription, press the Q button specially trained OnStar Emergency
and the current GPS location will be Advisors.
sent to an OnStar advisor who will X : Push this button for hands‐free,
assess your problem, contact voice‐activated calling and to give
Roadside Assistance, and relay voice commands for Hands‐Free
your exact location to get the help For vehicles with an active OnStar
subscription, OnStar uses several Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
you need. Navigation.
innovative technologies and live
Advisors to provide a wide range
of safety, security, navigation,
diagnostics, and calling services.
In Brief 1-23
Automatic Crash Response, OnStar service is subject to the OnStar service may not work if the
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, OnStar Terms and Conditions OnStar equipment is not properly
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle included in the OnStar Glove installed or you have not maintained
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Box Kit. it even if the vehicle is in good
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn OnStar service requires wireless working order and in compliance
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling communication networks and the with all government regulations.
are available on most vehicles. Not Global Positioning System (GPS) If you try to add, connect, or modify
all OnStar services are available on satellite network. Not all OnStar any equipment or software in the
all vehicles. For more information, services are available everywhere vehicle, OnStar service may not
see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visit or on all vehicles at all times. work. Other problems beyond
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or OnStar's control may prevent
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact OnStar service cannot work unless service to you, such as hills, tall
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR the vehicle is in a place where buildings, tunnels, weather,
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY OnStar has an agreement with a electrical system design and
1‐877‐248‐2080; or push wireless service provider for service architecture of the vehicle, damage
the Q button to speak with an in that area, and the wireless to important parts of the vehicle in a
OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day, service provider has coverage, crash, or wireless phone network
network capacity, reception, and congestion or jamming.
seven days a week.
technology compatible with OnStar's
For a full description of OnStar service. Service involving location See Radio Frequency Statement on
services and system limitations, see information about the vehicle cannot page 13‑16 for information
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the work unless GPS signals are regarding Part 15 of the Federal
glove box. available, unobstructed, and Communications Commission (FCC)
compatible with the OnStar rules and Industry Canada
hardware. The vehicle must have a Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
working electrical system and
adequate battery power for the
OnStar equipment to operate.
1-24 In Brief
OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Controls Increase the volume of the radio if
This vehicle may have Talk/Mute the OnStar Advisor cannot be
buttons that can be used to interact heard.
with OnStar Hands-Free calling. If the light next to the OnStar
See Steering Wheel Controls on buttons is red, the system may not
page 5‑2 for more information. be functioning properly.
On some vehicles, the Talk/Mute Push Q and request a vehicle
buttons can be used to dial phone diagnostic. If the light appears clear
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's (no light appears), your OnStar
Guide for more information. subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
Push Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Windows Vehicle Security
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-14 Windows
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-11
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
{ WARNING transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons; children or others could
Leaving children in a vehicle with be badly injured or even killed.
the ignition key is dangerous for They could operate the power
many reasons. Children or others windows or other controls or even
could be badly injured or even make the vehicle move. The
killed. They could operate the windows will function with the
power windows or other controls RKE transmitter in the vehicle
The key that is part of the Remote
or even make the vehicle move. and they could be seriously
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can
The windows will function with the injured or killed if caught in the be used for the ignition and all locks
keys in the ignition and children path of a closing window. Do not if the vehicle is a key access
could be seriously injured or killed leave the RKE transmitter in a vehicle. If the vehicle has the
if caught in the path of a closing vehicle with children. keyless ignition, the key can be
window. Do not leave the keys in used for the locks.
a vehicle with children.
With an active OnStar subscription,

. Check the transmitter's battery.
an OnStar Advisor may remotely See “Battery Replacement” later
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar® on in this section.
page 1‑22. . If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
Remote Keyless Entry dealer or a qualified technician
(RKE) System for service.
See Radio Frequency Statement on Remote Keyless Entry
page 13‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal (RKE) System Operation
Communications Commission (FCC) The transmitter functions will work
rules and Industry Canada up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the
Press the button on the RKE Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
transmitter to extend the key. Press vehicle. On vehicles with remote
the button and the key blade to If there is a decrease in the RKE start the distance will be greater.
retract the key. operating range: Keep in mind that other conditions,
See your dealer if a new key is . Check the distance. The such as those previously stated, can
needed. transmitter may be too far from impact the performance of the
the vehicle. transmitter.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be . Check the location. Other
damaged to get them out. Always vehicles or objects may be
carry a spare key. blocking the signal.
If locked out of the vehicle, see
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13‑6.
Pressing Q may also arm the turn signals flash for 30 seconds,
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle or until 7 is pressed again or the
Alarm System on page 2‑14. vehicle is started.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the / (Remote Vehicle Start): For
driver door or all doors. See “Door vehicles with this feature, press Q
Unlock Options” under Vehicle
and then press and hold / within
five seconds to start the engine from
The turn signal indicators may flash outside the vehicle using the RKE
and/or the horn may sound to transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
indicate unlocking. See “Unlock Start on page 2‑9 for additional
Feedback” under Vehicle information.
The buttons on the keys are
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
Pressing K will disarm the disabled when there is a key is in
The turn signal indicators may flash theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle the ignition, if equipped.
and/or the horn may sound to Alarm System on page 2‑14.
indicate locking. See “Locking Keyless Access Operation
Feedback” under Vehicle V (Remote Trunk Release):
Some vehicles have a keyless
Personalization on page 5‑34. Press and hold briefly to open the
access system that lets you lock
trunk.
and unlock the doors and access
If the driver door is open when Q is 7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic the trunk without removing the RKE
pressed, all doors lock except the Alarm): Press and hold briefly to transmitter from your pocket, purse,
driver door, if enabled through the locate the vehicle. The exterior briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter
vehicle personalization. lamps flash and the horn chirps. should be within 1 m (3 ft) of the
If the passenger door is open when door or trunk being opened. If the
Press and hold 7 for at least
Q is pressed, all doors lock. two seconds to sound the panic
vehicle has this feature, there will be
a body colored touch pad on the
alarm. The horn sounds and the outside front door handles.
Keyless Unlocking Keyless Locking Lock Sensor

With the RKE transmitter within If the vehicle has the keyless
1 m (3 ft), approach the front door access system, this feature allows
and pull the handle to unlock and you to select whether the doors
open the door. If the transmitter is automatically lock during normal
recognized, the door will unlock vehicle exit. When the vehicle is
and open. turned off and all doors become
Entering any door other than the closed, the vehicle will determine
driver door will always cause all of how many keyless access
the doors to unlock. This is not transmitters remain in the vehicles
customizable. interior. If at least one keyless
access transmitter has been
To customize which doors unlock removed from the interior of the
when the driver door is opened, see vehicle, the doors will lock after
“Door Unlock Options” under eight seconds. When all doors are closed and the
Vehicle Personalization on ignition is off, the vehicle can be
page 5‑34. If there are two keyless access
locked by pressing this area on the
transmitters in the vehicle and one
door handle. This feature will be
is removed, the other will be locked
available for several minutes after
in. A person approaching the
the vehicle has been turned off.
outside of the locked vehicle without
an authorized keyless access Keyless Trunk Opening
transmitter will not be able to open
Lift up on the touch pad located
the door, even with the transmitter in
above the license plate to open the
the vehicle.
trunk if the RKE transmitter is
within range.
Programming Transmitters to The Driver Information

the Vehicle Center (DIC) displays READY
FOR REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a 3. Remove the recognized key and
transmitter is lost or stolen, a place the new transmitter into
replacement can be purchased and the transmitter slot.
programmed through your dealer. 4. Press the ignition. When the
The vehicle can be reprogrammed transmitter is learned, the DIC
so that lost or stolen transmitters no will show that it is ready to
longer work. Any remaining program the next transmitter.
transmitters will need to be
reprogrammed. Each vehicle can 5. Remove the transmitter from the
have up to five transmitters matched 1. Remove the plastic trim piece transmitter pocket and press K.
to it. from the small storage area next To program additional
to the accessory power outlet transmitters, repeat Steps 3
Programming with a Recognized towards the front of the console,
Transmitter (Keyless Access through 5.
to access the transmitter slot.
Vehicles Only) Push the button on the When all additional transmitters
A new transmitter can be recognized transmitter to extend are programmed, press and hold
programmed to the vehicle when the key blade. Insert the key the ignition for 10 seconds to
there is one recognized transmitter. blade into the transmitter slot. exit programming mode.
To program, the vehicle must be off Replace the plastic trim piece
2. Insert the vehicle key of the new from the small storage area.
and all of the transmitters, both transmitter into the key lock
currently recognized and new, must cylinder located on the outside
be with you. of the driver door and turn the
key to the unlock position
five times within 10 seconds.
Programming without a The DIC displays will again 4. Remove the plastic trim piece
Recognized Transmitter show REMOTE LEARN from the small storage area next
(Keyless Access Vehicles Only) PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. to the accessory power outlet
If there are no currently recognized 3. Repeat Step 2 two additional towards the front of the console,
transmitters available, follow this times. After the third time all to access the transmitter slot.
procedure to program up to five previously known transmitters Push the button on the
transmitters. This feature is not will no longer work with the recognized transmitter to extend
available in Canada. This procedure vehicle. Remaining transmitters the key blade. Insert the key
will take approximately 30 minutes can be relearned during the blade into the transmitter slot.
to complete. The vehicle must be off next steps. 5. Press the ignition. When the
and all of the transmitters you wish The DIC display should transmitter is learned the DIC
to program must be with you. now show READY FOR will show that it is ready to
1. Insert the vehicle key of the REMOTE # 1. program the next transmitter.
transmitter into the key lock 6. Remove the transmitter from the
cylinder located on the outside transmitter slot and press K.
of the driver door and turn the
key to the unlock position five To program additional
times within 10 seconds. transmitters, repeat Steps 4
through 6.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN When all additional transmitters
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 10 seconds to
2. Wait for 10 minutes until the exit programming mode.
DIC displays PRESS ENGINE Replace the plastic trim piece
START BUTTON TO LEARN from the small storage area.
and then press the ignition.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low To start the vehicle: Battery Replacement
Transmitter Battery 1. Remove the plastic trim piece Replace the battery if the REPLACE
If the transmitter battery is weak, the from the small storage area next BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
DIC may display NO REMOTE to the accessory power outlet message displays in the DIC. See
DETECTED when you try to start towards the front of the console, “Replace Battery in Remote Key”
the vehicle. The REPLACE to access the transmitter slot. under Key and Lock Messages on
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY 2. Push the button on the page 5‑31.
message may also be displayed recognized transmitter to extend The battery is not rechargeable.
at this time. the key blade. Insert the key To replace the battery:
blade into the transmitter slot.
1. Push the button on the
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or transmitter to extend the
N (Neutral), press the brake key blade.
pedal and the ignition button.
See Starting the Engine on
page 9‑20 for additional
information about the vehicle's
keyless ignition with pushbutton
start.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
2. Remove the battery cover by

prying it with a finger.
3. Remove the battery by pushing cooling mode. Once the key is 3. Immediately after completing
on the battery and sliding it turned to ON/RUN, the climate Step 2, press and hold / until
toward the key blade. control system will turn on at the the turn signal lamps flash, or for
4. Insert the new battery, positive setting the vehicle was last set to. about two seconds if the vehicle
side facing up. Push the battery If the vehicle has heated seats, they is not in view.
down until it is held in place. may come on during a remote start.
See Heated Front Seats on When the engine starts, the parking
Replace with a CR2032 or lamps will turn on and remain on as
equivalent battery. page 3‑7 for more information.
long as the engine is running. The
5. Snap the battery cover back on Laws in some local communities doors will be locked and the climate
to the transmitter. may restrict the use of remote control system may come on.
starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote start The engine will continue to run for
Remote Vehicle Start to have the vehicle in view. Check 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
The vehicle may have this feature local regulations for any 10-minute time extension. Remote
that allows you to start the engine requirements. start can be extended only once.
from outside the vehicle. There are other conditions which Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): can affect the performance of the before driving.
This button will be on the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Extending Engine Run Time
RKE transmitter if the vehicle has Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 for
remote start. additional information. For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 through 3 while the engine
Vehicles with an automatic climate Starting the Vehicle is still running. The remote start can
control system will default to a be extended once.
To start the engine using the remote
heating or cooling mode depending
start feature: When the remote start is extended,
on the outside temperature during a
remote start. A vehicle without 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the second 10 minutes will start
automatic climate control will the vehicle. immediately.
default to the last used heating or
2. Press and release Q.
For example, if the engine has Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks
been running for five minutes, and Will Not Work
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if:
{ WARNING
A maximum of two remote starts, . The key is in the ignition. Unlocked doors can be
or a single start with an extension, dangerous.
are allowed between ignition cycles. . The hood is not closed. . Passengers, especially
After this, the vehicle's ignition . The hazard warning flashers children, can easily open the
switch must be turned to ON/RUN are on. doors and fall out of a moving
and then back to LOCK/OFF using . The malfunction indicator lamp vehicle. The chance of being
the key, before the remote start is on. thrown out of the vehicle in a
procedure can be used again. crash is increased if the
. The engine coolant temperature doors are not locked. So, all
Canceling a Remote Start is too high. passengers should wear
To cancel a remote start, do one of . The oil pressure is low. safety belts properly and the
the following: doors should be locked
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the whenever the vehicle is
single remote start with an
driven.
vehicle and press and hold / extension, have already
. Young children who get into
until the parking lamps turn off. been used.
unlocked vehicles may be
. Turn on the hazard warning . The vehicle is not in P (Park).
unable to get out. A child can
flashers. be overcome by extreme heat
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Power Door Locks Automatic Door Locks
Automatic Door Lock
. Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door The doors are programmed to
when slowing or stopping the automatically lock when the shift
vehicle. Lock the doors to lever is moved out of P (Park).
help prevent this from The automatic door lock feature
happening. cannot be disabled.
Automatic Door Unlock
To lock or unlock a door from
outside the vehicle, use the Remote The doors will automatically unlock
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. when the shift lever is moved into
From inside the vehicle, use the P (Park).
power door lock switch or the See Vehicle Personalization on
manual lock knob. Pushing down The power door lock switch is on page 5‑34.
the manual lock knob on the driver the instrument panel.
door will lock all doors. Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
The doors can also be unlocked K (Unlock): Press to unlock
from the inside by pulling the door the doors.
handle. Pulling the door handle
again unlatches the door.
Safety Locks Doors WARNING (Continued)

The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear Trunk . Adjust the Climate Control
doors from inside the vehicle. system to a setting that
{ WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See “Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems” in the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Index.
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle has a power
seal between the body and the liftgate, disable the power
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine liftgate function.
exhaust contains carbon For more information about
monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine
seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 9‑27.
unconsciousness and even death.
Press o { to activate the safety If the vehicle must be driven with
locks on the rear doors. The LED the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
light (A) comes on when activated. . Close all of the windows.
The rear door power windows are . Fully open the air outlets on
also disabled. or under the instrument
Press o { again to deactivate the panel.
lockout switch. (Continued)
If the LED light flashes, the feature
may not be working properly.
Remote Trunk Release If the engine is running, the doors

must be unlocked. Vehicles with an
automatic transmission must be in
P (Park), vehicles with a manual
transmission must have the park
brake applied.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk There is an emergency trunk
as it could damage the handle. release handle located inside the
The emergency trunk release trunk on the trunk lid. The release
To open the trunk from outside the
handle is only intended to aid a handle can be accessed by folding
vehicle, press the V button on person trapped in a latched trunk,
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the rear seatback. See Rear Seats
enabling them to open the trunk on page 3‑8. Pull the release handle
transmitter, or by pressing the touch from the inside.
pad above the license plate when to open the trunk from the inside.
the doors are unlocked.
Vehicle Security Disarming the System Immobilizer Operation

This vehicle has theft-deterrent To disarm the system press K on This vehicle has a passive
features; however, they do not make the RKE transmitter. theft-deterrent system.
it impossible to steal. The system does not have to be
Turning off the System Alarm
manually armed or disarmed.
Vehicle Alarm System If there is an attempt to open the
The vehicle is automatically
doors, trunk, or hood without first
This vehicle has a theft alarm immobilized when the key is
system. pressing K on the transmitter, the removed from the ignition.
system alarm will be activated.
Arming the System The exterior lamps will flash and The system is automatically
the horn will sound for about disarmed when the vehicle is
To arm the system, use the power started with the correct key. The key
door lock switch or the RKE 30 seconds.
uses a transponder that matches an
transmitter to lock the vehicle while To turn off the system alarm immobilizer control unit in the
exiting with the vehicle turned off. press K on the RKE transmitter. vehicle and automatically disarms
The alarm arms after about the system. Only an authorized key
30 seconds after all the doors have Immobilizer starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
been closed. not start if the key is damaged.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
Press Q again and the system arms page 13‑16 for information
immediately. regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
The security light, located in the rules and Industry Canada
center of the instrument panel, will Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
flash slowly.
If the engine does not start and the Exterior Mirrors

security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again. Convex Mirrors
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged { WARNING
The security light, located in the or the light continues to stay on, try A convex mirror can make things,
instrument panel cluster, comes on another ignition key. If the engine like other vehicles, look farther
if there is a problem with arming or does not start with the other key, the
disarming the theft-deterrent away than they really are. If you
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
system. cut too sharply into the right lane,
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer who can you could hit a vehicle on the
When trying to start the vehicle, the right. Check the inside mirror or
security light comes on briefly when service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made. glance over your shoulder before
the ignition is turned on. changing lanes.
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
to return it to the original position.
Heated Mirrors
The vehicle may have heated
mirrors.
Vehicles with a manual mirror Controls for the outside power
adjustment have controls next to mirrors are located on the
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the outside rearview
each mirror. driver door.
mirrors. See “Rear Window
Adjust the inside rearview mirror by To adjust the mirror: Defogger” under Automatic Climate
moving it up and down or side to 1. Turn the selector switch to Control System on page 8‑3 for
side. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare L (left) or R (right) to choose more information.
from the headlamps behind you. the driver or passenger mirror.
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use. 2. Move the control to adjust
the mirror.
3. Turn the selector switch to the
O position to deselect the mirror.
Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Vehicles with OnStar have three

control buttons located at the
Rearview Mirror bottom of the mirror. See your
Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dealer for more information about
Hold the mirror in the center to dimming inside rearview mirror. OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
move it for a clearer view of behind Automatic dimming reduces the See the OnStar Owner's Guide for
your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to glare from the headlamps of the more information about the services
avoid glare from the headlamps vehicle behind you. The dimming OnStar provides.
behind you. Push the tab at the feature and the indicator light come
on each time the vehicle is started. Cleaning the Mirror
bottom of the mirror forward for
daytime use and pull it for Do not spray glass cleaner directly
nighttime use. on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with
or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many
windows closed is dangerous. reasons. Children or others could
They can be overcome by the be badly injured or even killed.
extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power
permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or even
from heat stroke. Never leave a make the vehicle move. The
child, a helpless adult, or a pet windows will function and they
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are could be seriously injured or killed
designed to improve fuel economy if caught in the path of a closing
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a window. Do not leave keys in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear vehicle with children.
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the When there are children in the
sound, open either a front window rear seat use the window lockout
or the sunroof (if equipped). button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Express Window Operation If conditions prevent the window

from closing and the window
Your vehicle may have windows
continues to auto-reverse, it is
with an express-up or down feature.
possible to close the window with
This feature allows the window to be
the ignition in ON/RUN by holding
lowered or raised without holding
the window switch in the partially or
the switch. Passenger side and rear
fully pulled up position. Release of
windows only have express-down.
the switch from the partially pulled
Pull a window switch up or push it
up position will cause the window to
down all the way, release it, and
stop. Release of the switch from the
the window goes down or up
fully pulled up position will activate
automatically. Stop the window by
the express-up and related obstacle
pushing or pulling the switch.
detection features.
The power window switches on the
driver door control all four windows. Obstacle Detection Feature Programming the Power
The passenger doors have a If equipped with express-up, and an Windows
window switch that controls that object is in the path of the window
window. Push the switch down to when closing, the window will stop If the battery on the vehicle has
open the window. Pull the front of at the obstruction and auto-reverse been recharged or disconnected,
the switch up to close it. to a preset factory position. Weather or is not working, you will need to
conditions such as severe cold and/ reprogram each front power window
The switches work when the for the express-up feature to work.
ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ or ice may also cause the window to
auto-reverse. The window will return Before reprogramming, replace or
ACCESSORY, or in Retained recharge the vehicle's battery.
Accessory Power (RAP). See to normal operation once the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) obstruction or condition is removed.
on page 9‑23.
To program each front window, Window Lockout If the LED light flashes, the feature
follow these steps: may not be working properly.
1. With the ignition in ACC/ Overload Feature
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory If the windows are operated
Power (RAP) is active, close repeatedly in short intervals, the
all doors. window operation is disabled for a
short time.
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window Sun Visors
is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds The rear window lockout switch is
after the window is completely on the driver door. This feature
closed. prevents the rear passenger
The window is now reprogrammed. windows from operating, except
Repeat the process for the other from the driver position.
windows. Press o { to activate the rear
window lockout switch. The LED
light (A) comes on when activated.
The rear door locks are also Pull the sun visor down to block
disabled. glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
Press o { again to deactivate the window, or to extend along the rod,
lockout switch. if available.
Roof To open or close the sunroof, press

the open or close sunroof switch (A)
to the first detent position.
Sunroof
To express open or close the
sunroof with the safety function
enabled, press the open or close
sunroof switch (A) to the second
detent position and release.
To stop the movement, press the
switch again. Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
To automatically tilt or close the could cause an issue with sunroof
sunroof, press the tilt open or operation, noise, or plugging within
close sunroof switch (B). the water drainage system.
If an object is in the path of the Periodically open the sunroof and
sunroof while it is closing, the remove any obstacles or loose
anti-pinch feature will detect the debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
On vehicles with a sunroof, the object and stop the sunroof. roof sealing area using a clean
switches are on the overhead cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
console. remove grease from the sunroof.
opened or closed if the vehicle has
The sunroof only operates when an electrical failure. Sunshade
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ The sunshade is manually operated.
ACCESSORY or in Retained Close or open the sunshade by
Accessory Power (RAP). See sliding. When the sunroof is
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) opened, the sunshade is
on page 9‑23 for more information. always open.
Safety Function To initialize the sunroof:

If the sunroof has any resistance 1. Press the close sunroof switch
during automatic closing, it will to the first detent position. Hold
immediately stop and reverse. the switch in this position for
To override the safety function, 10 seconds after the sunroof has
press and hold the close sunroof fully closed.
switch. The sunroof closes without 2. Press the open sunroof switch to
the safety function. To stop the the first detent position. Release
movement, release the switch. the switch when the sunroof is
fully opened.
Initializing the Sunroof
3. Press the open sunroof switch to
If the sunroof cannot be fully closed, the first detent position and hold
or the express open or close feature for 10 seconds. The sunroof will
does not function, the sunroof may automatically close. The switch
need to be initialized. This can can be released when the
happen if the battery has been sunroof stops.
disconnected or the sunroof has
been serviced.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-37
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-40
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-21 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Securing Child Restraints
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats What Will You See after an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-50
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Passenger Sensing
Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
How to Wear Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Adding Equipment to the
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-31
Safety Belt Use During Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-32
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints in
the outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head Front Seats

restraints are not designed to
be removed.
Seat Adjustment
If you are installing a child restraint
in the rear seat, see “Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the { WARNING
LATCH System” under Lower You can lose control of the
Anchors and Tethers for Children vehicle if you try to adjust a
(LATCH System) on page 3‑41.
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
To adjust a manual seat:
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Pull the handle at the front of
the vehicle is not moving. the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
Seat Height Adjuster Seat Cushion Tilt Feature Power Seat Adjustment
Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,

If available, move the lever up or Four-Way Similar To adjust the power driver seat,
down to manually raise or lower if equipped:
the seat. If available, move the lever up or
down to raise or lower the front of . Move the seat forward or
the seat cushion. rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
To adjust the seatback, see

Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5 for { WARNING
more information.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
Reclining Seatbacks stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
{ WARNING Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
You can lose control of the
locked.
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and To recline the seatback:
confuse you, or make you push a
1. Lift the lever.
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when If necessary, move the safety
the vehicle is not moving. belt out of the way to access
the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright

position: WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without The lap belt cannot do its job
applying pressure to the either. In a crash, the belt could
seatback, and the seatback go up over your abdomen. The
returns to the upright position. belt forces would be there, not at
2. Push and pull on the seatback to your pelvic bones. This could
make sure it is locked. cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
{ WARNING vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
Sitting in a reclined position when
back in the seat and wear the Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is in motion can be
safety belt properly. the vehicle is moving.
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
Heated Front Seats The passenger seat may take

longer to heat up.
{ WARNING Remote Start Heated Seats
If you cannot feel temperature When it is cold outside, the heated

seats can be turned on
change or pain to the skin, the
automatically during a remote
seat heater may cause burns
vehicle start. The heated seats will
even at low temperatures. To be canceled when the ignition is
reduce the risk of burns, people turned on. Press the control to use
with such a condition should use the heated seats after the vehicle is
care when using the seat heater, started.
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on On vehicles with heated front seats, The heated seat indicator lights on
the seat that insulates against the controls are on the center the control do not turn on during a
console. The engine must be remote start.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may running to operate the heated seats. The temperature performance of an
cause the seat heater to Press L or M to heat the driver or unoccupied seat may be reduced.
overheat. An overheated seat This is normal.
passenger seat cushion and
heater may cause a burn or may seatback. The heated seats will not turn on
damage the seat. during a remote start unless the
Press the control once for the
heated seat feature is enabled in
highest setting. With each press of
the vehicle personalization menu.
the control, the heated seat will
See Remote Vehicle Start on
change to the next lower setting,
page 2‑9 and “Remote Start Auto
and then the off setting. Three lights
Heat Seats” under Vehicle
indicate the highest setting and one
Personalization on page 5‑34 for
light the lowest.
more information.
Rear Seats
Either side of the rear seatback can
be folded.
To fold the rear seatbacks:
1. Place the front seatbacks in the
upright position. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the 3. Make sure the safety belt is in A tab near the seatback lever
safety belts and return them to the guide on top of the seatback. raises when the seatback is
their normal stowed position unlocked.
before folding a rear seat. 4. Reach under the safety belt and
pull the lever to unlock the 5. Fold the seatback forward.
2. Unbuckle the rear safety belts seatback.
and make sure the safety belt Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the
buckles are stowed in the other seatback, if desired.
pockets in the seat cushion.
To raise the seatback: 1. Make sure the safety belt is in

the guide on the top of the { WARNING
{ WARNING seatback.
If the seatback is not locked, it
2. Lift the seatback up and push it could move forward in a sudden
A safety belt that is improperly rearward until it clicks into place.
routed, not properly attached, stop or crash. That could cause
Keep the safety belts clear of the injury to the person sitting there.
or twisted will not provide the seatback and untwisted.
protection needed in a crash. The Always pull forward on the top of
person wearing the belt could be A tab near the seatback lever the seatback at the area of the
retracts when the seatback is latch to be sure it is locked.
seriously injured. After raising the
locked in place.
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are The center rear safety belt may 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
properly routed and attached, and lock when you raise the make sure it is locked into
are not twisted. seatback. If this happens, let the position.
belt go back all the way and
start again. 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the
other seatback, if necessary.
Keep the seat in the upright locked
position when not in use.
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some
in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts.
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
Do not let anyone ride where a injured or killed. Do not allow
safety belt cannot be worn passengers to ride in any area of
properly. In a crash, if you or your the vehicle that is not equipped
passenger(s) are not wearing with seats and safety belts.
safety belts, injuries can be much Always wear a safety belt, and
worse than if you are wearing check that all passenger(s) are
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously restrained properly too. as fast as the vehicle does. If the
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. reminder to buckle the safety belts. It could be the windshield, the
In addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other page 5‑10 for additional information.
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
When you wear a safety belt, you them. Whether or not an airbag There are important things to know
and the vehicle slow down together. is provided, all occupants still about wearing a safety belt properly.
There is more time to stop because have to buckle up to get the
you stop over a longer distance and, most protection.
when worn properly, your strongest Also, in nearly all states and in
bones take the forces from the all Canadian provinces, the law
safety belts. That is why wearing requires wearing safety belts.
safety belts makes such good
sense. How to Wear Safety Belts
Questions and Answers About Properly
Safety Belts
This section is only for people of
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle adult size.
after a crash if I am wearing a
There are special things to know
safety belt?
about safety belts and children. And
A: You could be — whether you are there are different rules for smaller
. Sit up straight and always keep
wearing a safety belt or not. children and infants. If a child will be your feet on the floor in front
Your chance of being conscious riding in the vehicle, see Older of you.
during and after a crash, so you Children on page 3‑33 or Infants . Always use the correct buckle
can unbuckle and get out, is and Young Children on page 3‑35. for your seating position.
much greater if you are belted. Follow those rules for everyone's
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why protection.
should I have to wear safety It is very important for all occupants
belts? to buckle up. Statistics show that
A: Airbags are supplemental unbelted people are hurt more often
systems only; so they work with in crashes than those who are
safety belts — not instead of wearing safety belts.

. Wear the lap part of the belt low
and snug on the hips, just WARNING (Continued)
touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong . Never wear the shoulder belt
pelvic bones and you would be under both arms or behind
less likely to slide under the lap your back.
belt. If you slid under it, the belt . Never route the lap or
would apply force on your shoulder belt over an
abdomen. This could cause armrest.
serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt. the belt across you. Do not let it
forces. The shoulder belt locks if get twisted.
The following instructions explain
there is a sudden stop or crash.
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
properly.
{ WARNING 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
You can be seriously injured, adjustable, so you can sit up belt go back slightly to unlock it.
or even killed, by not wearing straight. To see how, see Then pull the belt across you
your safety belt properly. “Seats” in the Index. more slowly.
. Never allow the lap or If the shoulder portion of a
shoulder belt to become passenger belt is pulled out all
loose or twisted. the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
(Continued) If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section for
instructions on use and
important safety information.
3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should
Pull up on the latch plate to return to its stowed position.
make sure it is secure. If the belt Before a door is closed, be sure the
is not long enough, see Safety safety belt is out of the way. If a
Belt Extender on page 3‑17. door is slammed against a safety
Position the release button on belt, damage can occur to both the
the buckle so that the safety belt safety belt and the vehicle.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull
could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt.
necessary.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has a shoulder belt This vehicle has safety belt
height adjuster for the driver and pretensioners for front outboard
right front passenger seating occupants. Although the safety belt
positions. pretensioners cannot be seen, they
Adjust the guide so the shoulder are part of the safety belt assembly.
portion of the belt is on the shoulder They can help tighten the safety
and not falling off of it. The belt belts during the early stages of a
should be close to, but not moderate to severe frontal and near
contacting, the neck. Improper frontal crash if the threshold
shoulder belt height adjustment conditions for pretensioner
could reduce the effectiveness of activation are met.
the safety belt in a crash. See How Press the release button (A) and Pretensioners work only once. If the
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on move the height adjuster to the pretensioners activate in a crash,
page 3‑11. desired position. The adjuster can they will need to be replaced, and
be moved up by pushing the slide/ probably other new parts for the
trim up. After the adjuster is set to vehicle's safety belt system. See
the desired position, try to move it Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
down without pushing the release after a Crash on page 3‑18.
button to make sure it has locked
into position.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide, if equipped, for

Guides each outboard passenger position in
the rear seat. To install a comfort
This vehicle may have rear safety guide to the safety belt:
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through the dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Remove the guide from its

storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release
twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
5. To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt
can be removed from the guide.
Store the guide in its storage
pocket on the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are all working properly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑10 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑18.
seat it is made to fit. The extender
A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the
throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑11.
possible.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver For seat-mounted side impact
Airbag System and the passenger seated airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
The vehicle has the following directly behind the driver. side of the seatback closest to
airbags: . A roof-rail airbag for the front the door.
. A frontal airbag for the driver. outboard passenger and the For roof-rail airbags, the word
passenger seated directly AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
. A frontal airbag for the front behind the front outboard
outboard passenger. passenger. Airbags are designed to supplement
. A knee airbag for the driver. the protection provided by safety
All vehicle airbags have the word belts. Even though today's airbags
. A knee airbag for the front AIRBAG on the trim or on a label are also designed to help reduce
outboard passenger. near the deployment opening. the risk of injury from the force of an
. A seat-mounted side impact For frontal airbags, the word inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
airbag for the driver. AIRBAG is on the center of the very quickly to do their job.
. A seat-mounted side impact steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front
airbag for the front outboard
outboard passenger.
passenger.
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
. Seat-mounted side impact
is on the lower part of the
airbags for the second row
instrument panel.
outboard passengers.
Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
{ WARNING force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag when
You can be severely injured or an eye, anyone who is up it inflates can be seriously injured
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to any or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt, even airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
with airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants.
belts, not replace them. Also, airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle's safety belt
airbags are not designed to inflate on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system is
in every crash. In some crashes forward. Safety belts help keep designed for them. Young
safety belts are the only restraint. you in position before and during children and infants need the
See When Should an Airbag a crash. Always wear a safety protection that a child restraint
Inflate? on page 3‑23. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
crash helps reduce the chance of the vehicle. Children on page 3‑33 or Infants
hitting things inside the vehicle or and Young Children on
being ejected from it. Airbags are Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 3‑35.
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly, whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness The driver knee airbag is below the
Light on page 5‑11 for more steering column. The front outboard
information. passenger knee airbag is below the
The driver frontal airbag is in the glove box.
center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.
WARNING (Continued)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, block the inflation path of a
Side Similar Passenger Side Similar seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The seat-mounted side impact On vehicles with second row Never secure anything to the roof
airbags for the driver and front seat‐mounted side impact airbags, of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
outboard passenger are in the side they are in the sides of the rear by routing a rope or tie‐down
of the seatbacks closest to the door. seatback closest to the door. through any door or window
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, opening. If you do, the path of an
right front passenger, and second { WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be
row outboard passengers are in the blocked.
ceiling above the side windows. If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at The vehicle has electronic frontal
different crash speeds depending on sensors, which help the sensing
Inflate? whether the vehicle hits an object system distinguish between a
Frontal airbags are designed to straight on or at an angle, and moderate frontal impact and a more
inflate in moderate to severe frontal whether the object is fixed or severe frontal impact. For moderate
or near frontal crashes to help moving, rigid or deformable, narrow frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
reduce the potential for severe or wide. inflate at a level less than full
injuries, mainly to the driver's or Thresholds can also vary with deployment. For more severe frontal
front outboard passenger's head specific vehicle design. impacts, full deployment occurs.
and chest. However, they are only The vehicle has seat-mounted side
designed to inflate if the impact Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impact airbags and roof-rail airbags.
exceeds a predetermined See Airbag System on page 3‑19.
deployment threshold. Deployment impacts, or in many side impacts.
Seat-mounted side impact and
thresholds are used to predict how In addition, the vehicle has roof-rail airbags are intended to
severe a crash is likely to be in time dual-stage frontal airbags. inflate in moderate to severe side
for the airbags to inflate and help Dual-stage airbags adjust the crashes depending on the location
restrain the occupants. restraint according to crash severity. of the impact. In addition, these
Whether the frontal airbags will or Frontal knee airbags are designed roof‐rail airbags are intended to
should inflate is not based primarily to inflate in moderate to severe inflate during a rollover or in a
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. frontal or near frontal impacts that severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted
It depends on what is hit, the exceed a predetermined side impact and roof-rail airbags will
direction of the impact, and how deployment threshold. inflate if the crash severity is above
quickly the vehicle slows down. the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
Roof‐rail airbags are not intended to How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many
inflate in rear impacts. types of collisions, primarily
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is
is intended to inflate on the side of In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When
the vehicle that is struck. Both roof‐ near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on
rail airbags will inflate when either occupants can contact the steering page 3‑23 for more information.
side of the vehicle is struck or if the wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded
sensing system predicts that the moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement
vehicle is about to roll over on its even belted occupants can contact to safety belts.
side, or in a severe frontal impact. the inside of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after
say whether an airbag should have provided by safety belts by
inflated simply because of the distributing the force of the impact
an Airbag Inflates?
vehicle damage or repair costs. more evenly over the After the frontal airbags and
occupant's body. seat-mounted side impact airbags
What Makes an Airbag Rollover capable roof‐rail airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
Inflate? are designed to help contain the
even realize an airbag inflated.
head and chest of occupants in the
In a deployment event, the sensing Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
outboard seating positions in the
system sends an electrical signal partially inflated for some time after
first and second rows. The rollover
triggering a release of gas from the they inflate. Some components of
capable roof‐rail airbags are
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the the airbag module may be hot for
designed to help reduce the risk of
airbag causing the bag to break out several minutes. For location of the
full or partial ejection in rollover
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, airbags, see Where Are the
events, although no system can
and related hardware are all part of Airbags? on page 3‑21.
prevent all such ejections.
the airbag module.
For airbag location, see Where Are
the Airbags? on page 3‑21.
The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming To avoid this, everyone in the A crash severe enough to inflate
from the vents in the deflated vehicle should get out as soon as the airbags may have also
airbags. Airbag inflation does not it is safe to do so. If you have damaged important functions in
prevent the driver from seeing out of breathing problems but cannot the vehicle, such as the fuel
the windshield or being able to steer get out of the vehicle after an system, brake and steering
the vehicle, nor does it prevent airbag inflates, then get fresh air systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
people from leaving the vehicle. by opening a window or a door. appears to be drivable after a
If you experience breathing moderate crash, there may be
{ WARNING problems following an airbag concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
deployment, you should seek
When an airbag inflates, there medical attention. the vehicle.
may be dust in the air. This dust Use caution if you should attempt
could cause breathing problems to restart the engine after a crash
for people with a history of The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn has occurred.
asthma or other breathing trouble.
on the interior lamps, turn on the
(Continued) hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
the hazard warning flashers by
using the controls for those
features.
In many crashes severe enough to

. Let only qualified technicians
inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work
also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for
passenger airbag. service.
. Airbags are designed to inflate Canada
only once. After an airbag
Passenger Sensing
System The words ON and OFF, or the
inflates, you will need some new symbol for on and off, will be visible
parts for the airbag system. The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you use
If you do not get them, the sensing system for the front remote start, if equipped, to start the
airbag system will not be there outboard passenger position. The vehicle, you may not see the system
to help protect you in another passenger airbag status indicator check. When the system check is
crash. A new system will include will light on the instrument panel complete, either the word ON or
airbag modules and possibly when the vehicle is started. OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
other parts. The service manual be visible. See Passenger Airbag
for the vehicle covers the need Status Indicator on page 5‑12.
to replace other parts.
The passenger sensing system
. The vehicle has a crash sensing turns off the front outboard
and diagnostic module which passenger frontal airbag and knee
records information after a airbag under certain conditions.
crash. See Vehicle Data No other airbag is affected by the
Recording and Privacy on United States
passenger sensing system.
page 13‑14 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑14. The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the presence of a properly seated the front. This is because the risk to WARNING (Continued)
occupant and determine if the front the rear-facing child is so great,
outboard passenger frontal airbag if the airbag inflates. Even if the passenger sensing
and knee airbag should be allowed system has turned off the front
to inflate or not. { WARNING outboard passenger airbag(s), no
According to accident statistics, system is fail-safe. No one can
children are safer when properly A child in a rear-facing child guarantee that an airbag will not
secured in a rear seat in the correct restraint can be seriously injured inflate under some unusual
child restraint for their weight or killed if the passenger frontal circumstance, even though the
and size. airbag inflates. This is because airbag(s) are off.
the back of the rear-facing child
We recommend that children Secure rear-facing child restraints
restraint would be very close to
be secured in a rear seat, in a rear seat, even if the
the inflating airbag. A child in a
including: an infant or a child riding airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
in a rear-facing child restraint; a forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the forward-facing child restraint in
child riding in a forward-facing child
passenger frontal airbag inflates the front outboard passenger
seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are and the passenger seat is in a seat, always move the seat as far
large enough, using safety belts. forward position. back as it will go. It is better to
(Continued) secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is The passenger sensing system is

designed to turn off the front designed to turn on the front { WARNING
outboard passenger frontal airbag outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag if: and knee airbag anytime the system If the airbag readiness light ever
senses that a person of adult size is comes on and stays on, it means
. The front outboard passenger
sitting properly in the front outboard that something may be wrong
seat is unoccupied. with the airbag system. To help
passenger seat. When the
. The system determines that an passenger sensing system has avoid injury to yourself or others,
infant is present in a child allowed the airbag(s) to be enabled, have the vehicle serviced right
restraint. the on indicator will light and stay lit away. See Airbag Readiness
. A front outboard passenger as a reminder that the airbag(s) Light on page 5‑11 for more
takes his/her weight off of the are active. information, including important
seat for a period of time. For some children, including safety information.
. There is a critical problem with children in child restraints, and for
the airbag system or the very small adults, the passenger If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
passenger sensing system. sensing system may or may not turn Child Restraint
off the front outboard passenger
When the passenger sensing frontal airbag and knee airbag, If a child restraint has been installed
system has turned off the front depending upon the person's and the on indicator is lit:
outboard passenger frontal airbag seating posture and body build. 1. Turn the vehicle off.
and knee airbag, the off indicator Everyone in the vehicle who
will light and stay lit as a reminder has outgrown child restraints 2. Remove the child restraint from
that the airbag(s) are off. See should wear a safety belt the vehicle.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator properly — whether or not there 3. Remove any additional items
on page 5‑12. is an airbag for that person. from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint upon the child's seating posture and Use the following steps to allow the
following the directions provided body build. It is better to secure the system to detect that person and
by the child restraint child restraint in a rear seat. enable the front outboard passenger
manufacturer and refer to frontal airbag and knee airbag:
Securing Child Restraints (Rear If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Seat) on page 3‑48 or Securing
Child Restraints (Front 2. Remove any additional material
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑50. from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
5. If, after reinstalling the child heaters, or seat massagers.
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, 3. Place the seatback in the fully
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly upright position.
recline the vehicle seatback and 4. Have the person sit upright in
adjust the seat cushion, the seat, centered on the seat
if adjustable, to make sure that cushion, with legs comfortably
the vehicle seatback is not extended.
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion. Also make 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
sure the child restraint is not person remain in this position for
trapped under the vehicle head If a person of adult size is sitting in one minute after the on indicator
restraint. If this happens, adjust the front outboard passenger seat, is lit.
the head restraint. See Head but the off indicator is lit, it could be
Restraints on page 3‑2. because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may
or may not turn off the airbag(s) for
a child in a child restraint depending
Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the

System Operation performance of the passenger { WARNING
sensing system. Here is how:
Safety belts help keep the Stowing of articles under the
passenger in position on the seat . The passenger sensing system passenger seat or between the
during vehicle maneuvers and may turn off the passenger passenger seat cushion and
braking, which helps the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into seatback may interfere with the
sensing system maintain the the seat. If this happens, the off proper operation of the passenger
passenger airbag status. See indicator will be lit, and the sensing system.
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” airbag readiness light on the
in the Index for additional instrument panel will also be lit.
information about the importance of . Liquid pooled on the seat that Servicing the
proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger
sensing system will turn on the Airbags affect how the vehicle
such as a blanket or cushion, should be serviced. There are parts
or aftermarket equipment such as passenger airbag while a child
restraint or child occupant is on of the airbag system in several
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat places around the vehicle. Your
massagers can affect how well the the seat. If the passenger airbag
is turned on, the on indicator will dealer and the service manual have
passenger sensing system information about servicing the
operates. We recommend that you be lit.
vehicle and the airbag system. To
not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry purchase a service manual, see
aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag Service Publications Ordering
approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install a Information on page 13‑12.
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to child restraint or allow anyone to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on occupy the seat. See Airbag
page 3‑31 for more information Readiness Light on page 5‑11 for
about modifications that can affect important safety information.
how the system operates.
diagnostic module, steering wheel, This could either prevent proper

{ WARNING instrument panel, roof-rail airbag deployment of the passenger
modules, ceiling headliner or pillar airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
For up to 10 seconds after the garnish trim, front sensors, side sensing system from properly
vehicle is turned off and the impact sensors, or airbag wiring. turning off the passenger airbag(s).
battery is disconnected, an airbag See Passenger Sensing System on
can still inflate during improper Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location page 3‑26.
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it of the airbag sensors, sensing and If the vehicle has rollover roof‐rail
diagnostic module, and airbag airbags, see Different Size Tires
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
wiring. and Wheels on page 10‑59 for
They are probably part of the
In addition, the vehicle has a additional important information.
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and passenger sensing system for the If you have to modify your vehicle
make sure the person performing front outboard passenger position, because you have a disability and
work for you is qualified to do so. which includes sensors that are have questions about whether the
part of the passenger seat. The modifications will affect the vehicle's
passenger sensing system may not airbag system, or if you have
Adding Equipment to the operate properly if the original seat questions about whether the airbag
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle trim is replaced with non-GM system will be affected if the vehicle
covers, upholstery or trim, or with is modified for any other reason, call
Adding accessories that change the GM covers, upholstery or trim Customer Assistance. See
vehicle's frame, bumper system, designed for a different vehicle. Customer Assistance Offices on
height, front end or side sheet Any object, such as an aftermarket page 13‑3.
metal, may keep the airbag system seat heater or a comfort enhancing
from working properly. The pad or device, installed under or on
operation of the airbag system can top of the seat fabric, could also
also be affected by changing or interfere with the operation of the
moving any parts of the front seats, passenger sensing system.
safety belts, the airbag sensing and
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash See your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance
If the airbag readiness light stays on
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5‑11 for more information. airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly.
A damaged airbag system may Have the vehicle serviced right
Notice: If an airbag covering is away. See Airbag Readiness Light
damaged, opened, or broken, the not work properly and may
on page 5‑11 for more information.
airbag may not work properly. not protect you and your
Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death.
opened or broken airbag covers, To help make sure the airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
location of the airbags, see inspected and any necessary
Where Are the Airbags? on replacements made as soon
page 3‑21. See your dealer for as possible.
service.

. Does the lap belt fit low and
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the snug on the hips, touching the
weight and height limitations for that thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child . Can proper safety belt fit be
passes the fit test below: maintained for the length of the
. Sit all the way back on the seat. trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat.
edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to
return to the booster seat. wear safety belts?
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a
Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the
the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder
If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder
belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt should not cross the face or
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” neck. The lap belt should fit
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on snugly below the hips, just
Older children who have outgrown
page 3‑12 for more information. touching the top of the thighs.
booster seats should wear the
If the shoulder belt still does not This applies belt force to the
vehicle safety belts.
rest on the shoulder, then return child's pelvic bones in a crash.
to the booster seat. It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑12.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint The child might also slide under
system secured in a rear seating the lap belt. The belt force would
position. then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause
In a crash, children who are not serious or fatal injuries. The
buckled up can strike other people shoulder belt should go over the
who are buckled up, or can be
shoulder and across the chest.
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow two children to wear
safety belt with the shoulder belt
the same safety belt. The safety
behind their back. A child can be
belt cannot properly spread the
seriously injured by not wearing
impact forces. In a crash, the two
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
children can be crushed together
crash, the child would not be
and seriously injured. A safety
restrained by the shoulder belt.
belt must be used by only one
The child could move too far
person at a time.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury.
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the person's arms. An infant should
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate be secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the (Continued)
safety belts.
sure it is designed to be used in

{ WARNING a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
Never do this. that it meets federal motor
Children who are up against, vehicle safety standards.
or very close to, any airbag when The restraint manufacturer's
it inflates can be seriously injured instructions that come with the
or killed. Never put a rear-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in the right front height limitations for a particular
seat. Secure a rear-facing child child restraint. In addition, there
restraint in a rear seat. It is also are many kinds of restraints
better to secure a forward-facing available for children with
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of special needs.
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints?
child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which { WARNING
seat, always move the front are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it owner, are available in four basic To reduce the risk of neck and
will go. types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants
restraint should take into need complete support. This is
consideration not only the child's because an infant's neck is not
weight, height, and age but also fully developed and its head
whether or not the restraint will weighs so much compared with
be compatible with the motor the rest of its body. In a crash, an
vehicle in which it will be used. infant in a rear-facing child
For most basic types of child restraint settles into the restraint,
restraints, there are many so the crash forces can be
different models available. When (Continued)
purchasing a child restraint, be
WARNING (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
so small that the vehicle's regular A forward-facing child seat (B)
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
safety belt may not remain low on provides restraint for the child's
the hip bones, as it should. A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness.
Instead, it may settle up around provides restraint with the seating
the child's abdomen. In a crash, surface against the back of the
the belt would apply force on a infant.
body area that is unprotected by The harness system holds the infant
any bony structure. This alone in place and, in a crash, acts to
could cause serious or fatal keep the infant positioned in the
injuries. To reduce the risk of restraint.
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Securing an Add-On Child To help reduce the chance of injury,

Restraint in the Vehicle the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
{ WARNING seats by lap belts or the lap belt
A child can be seriously injured or portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
killed in a crash if the child the LATCH system. See Lower
restraint is not properly secured in Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑41 for
the vehicle. Secure the child
more information.
restraint properly in the vehicle
Children can be endangered in a
using the vehicle safety belt or
crash if the child restraint is not
LATCH system, following the properly secured in the vehicle.
(C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
When securing an add-on child In some areas, Certified Child Securing the Child within the
restraint, refer to the instructions Passenger Safety Technicians Child Restraint
that come with the restraint which (CPSTs) are available to inspect
may be on the restraint itself or in a and demonstrate how to correctly
booklet, or both, and to this manual. use and install child restraints.
{ WARNING
The child restraint instructions are In the U.S., refer to the A child can be seriously injured or
important, so if they are not National Highway Traffic Safety killed in a crash if the child is not
available, obtain a replacement Administration (NHTSA) website to properly secured in the child
copy from the manufacturer. locate the nearest child safety seat restraint. Secure the child
Keep in mind that an unsecured inspection station. For CPST
properly following the instructions
child restraint can move around in a availability in Canada, check with
that came with that child restraint.
collision or sudden stop and injure Transport Canada or the Provincial
people in the vehicle. Be sure to Ministry of Transportation office.
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Where to Put the

Restraint
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
children and infants are safer when restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
properly restrained in a child or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
restraint system or infant restraint passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
system secured in a rear seating because the back of the the right front seat, always move
position. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
We recommend that children and
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraints be secured in a rear
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
a child riding in a forward-facing passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑26 for additional
child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward information.
booster seat; and children, who are position.
large enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a
A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right rear seating position, study the
“Never put a rear-facing child front passenger frontal airbag, no instructions that came with the child
restraint in the front.” This is system is fail-safe. No one can restraint to make sure it is
because the risk to the rear-facing guarantee that an airbag will not compatible with this vehicle.
child is so great if the airbag deploy under some unusual
deploys. Child restraints and booster seats
circumstance, even though it is
vary considerably in size, and some
turned off.
may fit in certain seating positions
(Continued) better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Depending on where you place the Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with
child restraint and the size of the a top tether, you must also use
child restraint you may not be able
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make tether anchor.
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system in
child restraint prevents access to or The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle, you need a child
interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH
safety belt. child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
Wherever a child restraint is with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with
installed, be sure to secure the child Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the child
restraint properly. child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The
Keep in mind that an unsecured using the anchors, or use the following explains how to attach a
child restraint can move around in a vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint, following the instructions attachments in the vehicle.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
properly secure any child restraint in also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
the vehicle — even when no child is and attachments or top tether
in it. anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the
top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the top forward-facing child restraints have
built into the vehicle. There are of the child restraint to the vehicle. a top tether, and that the tether be
two lower anchors for each A top tether anchor is built into the attached. Be sure to read and follow
LATCH seating position that will vehicle. The top tether the instructions for the child
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each rear anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
The top tether anchors are under

the covers, behind the rear seat, on
Rear Seat the filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor on the same side of the
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating vehicle as the seating position
positions with top tether anchors. where the child restraint will be
H (Lower Anchor): Seating To assist in locating the top tether placed.
positions with two lower anchors. anchors, the top tether anchor Do not secure a child restraint in a
symbol is on the cover. position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock,
system secured in a rear seating restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the
position. See Where to Put the Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed.
Restraint on page 3‑40 for restraint to a single anchor could
additional information. cause the anchor or attachment Notice: Do not let the LATCH
to come loose or even break attachments rub against the
Securing a Child Restraint during a crash. A child or others vehicle’s safety belts. This may
Designed for the LATCH could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary,
System risk of serious or fatal injuries move buckled safety belts to
during a crash, attach only one avoid rubbing the LATCH
{ WARNING child restraint per anchor. attachments.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is Do not fold the empty rear seat
not attached to anchors, the child with a safety belt buckled. This
restraint will not be able to protect { WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
the child correctly. In a crash, the
Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position,
child could be seriously injured or
or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat.
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
wrapped around their neck and If you need to secure more than one
restraint properly using the
the safety belt continues to child restraint in the rear seat, see
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
tighten. Buckle any unused safety Where to Put the Restraint on
belts to secure the restraint,
belts behind the child restraint so page 3‑40 for additional information.
following the instructions that
children cannot reach them. Pull
came with the child restraint and Make sure to attach the child
the shoulder belt all the way out restraint at the proper anchor
the instructions in this manual.
(Continued) location.
This system is designed to make For outboard rear seating 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
installation of child restraints easier. positions, if the head the top tether according to
When using lower anchors, do not restraint interferes with the the child restraint
use the vehicle's safety belts. proper installation of the instructions and the
Instead use the vehicle's anchors child restraint, the head following instructions:
and child restraint attachments to restraint may be removed.
secure the restraints. Some See “Head Restraint
restraints also use another vehicle Removal and
anchor to secure a top tether. Reinstallation” at the end of
1. Attach and tighten the lower this section.
attachments to the lower 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
anchors. If the child restraint attachments on the child
does not have lower restraint to the lower
attachments or the desired anchors.
seating position does not have 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
lower anchors, secure the child
. If you are using a single
recommends that the top tether tether in a rear outboard
restraint with the top tether and be attached, attach and tighten
the safety belts. Refer to the seating position with an
the top tether to the top tether adjustable head restraint,
child restraint manufacturer anchor. Refer to the child
instructions and the instructions route the single tether
restraint instructions and the under the head restraint.
in this manual. following steps: See Head Restraints on
1.1. Find the lower anchors for 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. page 3‑2 for additional
the desired rear outboard information.
seating position. Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
. If you are using a dual . If you are using a single . If you are using a dual
tether in a rear outboard tether in the center seating tether in the center seating
seating position with an position, or the rear position, or the rear
adjustable head restraint, outboard head restraint has outboard head restraint has
route the dual tether around been removed, route the been removed, route the
the head restraint. See single tether over the dual tether over the
Head Restraints on seatback. seatback.
page 3‑2 for additional 3. Before placing a child in the
information. child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and back‐
and‐forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
installation.
Head Restraint Removal and 4. When the child restraint is

Reinstallation removed, reinstall the head
restraint before the seating
The rear outboard head restraints position is used.
can be removed if they interfere with
the proper installation of the child
restraint. { WARNING
To remove the head restraint: With head restraints that are not
1. Partially fold the seatback installed and adjusted properly,
forward. See Rear Seats on there is a greater chance that
page 3‑8 for additional occupants will suffer a neck/
information. spinal injury in a crash. Do not
2. Press both buttons on the head drive until the head restraints for
restraint posts at the same time, all occupants are installed and
and pull up on the head adjusted properly.
restraint.
3. Store the head restraint in the
trunk of the vehicle.
To reinstall the head restraint: Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a
{ WARNING rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is
system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle.
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH
resulting in serious injury or even system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
death in a crash. To help make
System) on page 3‑41 for how and
sure the LATCH system is
where to install the child restraint
working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
1. Insert the head restraint posts see your dealer to have the
into the holes in the top of the secured in the vehicle using a
system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
seatback. The notches (A) on
necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
the posts must face the driver
soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on
side of the vehicle.
page 3‑41 for top tether anchor
2. Push the head restraint down. locations.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
If necessary, press the height and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a
adjustment release button to crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
further lower the head restraint. may be needed. if a national or local law requires
See Head Restraints on that the top tether be anchored, or if
page 3‑2. New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
3. Try to move the head restraint to system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
make sure that it is locked in time of the crash. must be anchored.
place.
In Canada, the law requires that 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
forward-facing child restraints have the lap and shoulder portions of
a top tether, and that the tether be the vehicle's safety belt through
attached. or around the restraint. The child
If the child restraint does not have restraint instructions will show
the LATCH system, you will be you how.
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
needs to be installed in the rear out of the retractor to set the
seat, be sure to read Where to Put lock. When the retractor lock is
the Restraint on page 3‑40. set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the head restraint interferes 3. Push the latch plate into the
with the proper installation of the buckle until it clicks. If the latch
child restraint, the head restraint plate will not go fully into the
may be removed. See “Head buckle, check if the correct
Restraint Removal and buckle is being used.
Reinstallation” under Lower Position the release button on
Anchors and Tethers for the buckle so that the safety belt
Children (LATCH System) on could be quickly unbuckled if
page 3‑41. necessary.
6. If the child restraint has a top See “Head Restraint Removal and
tether, follow the child restraint Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
manufacturer's instructions and Tethers for Children (LATCH
regarding the use of the top System) on page 3‑41 for additional
tether. See Lower Anchors and information on installing the head
Tethers for Children (LATCH restraint properly.
System) on page 3‑41 for more
information. Securing Child Restraints
7. Before placing a child in the (Front Passenger Seat)
child restraint, make sure it is
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
Where to Put the Restraint on
on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
page 3‑40.
shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed, In addition, the vehicle has a
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than passenger sensing system which is
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. designed to turn off the right front
a forward-facing child restraint, it passenger frontal airbag and
To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee passenger knee airbag under
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child certain conditions. See Passenger
let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. Sensing System on page 3‑26 and
If the top tether is attached to a
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Try to pull the belt out of the top tether anchor, disconnect it.
on page 5‑12 for more information,
retractor to make sure the If the head restraint was removed,
including important safety
retractor is locked. If the reinstall it before the seating
information.
retractor is not locked, repeat position is used.
Steps 4 and 5.
A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 3‑41 for how and
if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right where to install the child restraint
front passenger frontal airbag, no using LATCH. If a child restraint is
{ WARNING system is fail-safe. No one can
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
guarantee that an airbag will not
A child in a rear-facing child Anchors and Tethers for Children
deploy under some unusual (LATCH System) on page 3‑41 for
restraint can be seriously injured
circumstance, even though it is top tether anchor locations.
or killed if the right front
turned off.
passenger airbag inflates. Do not secure a child seat in a
This is because the back of the Secure rear-facing child restraints position without a top tether anchor
rear-facing child restraint would in a rear seat, even if the airbag if a national or local law requires
be very close to the inflating is off. If you secure a that the top tether be anchored, or if
airbag. A child in a forward-facing forward-facing child restraint in the instructions that come with the
child restraint can be seriously the right front seat, always move child restraint say that the top strap
injured or killed if the right front the front passenger seat as far must be anchored.
passenger airbag inflates and back as it will go. It is better to In Canada, the law requires that
the passenger seat is in a secure the child restraint in a forward-facing child restraints have
forward position. rear seat. a top tether, and that the tether be
(Continued) See Passenger Sensing System attached.
on page 3‑26 for additional
information.
You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and passenger knee airbag, the
off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
light and stay lit when you start buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
the vehicle. See Passenger Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
Airbag Status Indicator on the buckle, so that the safety set, the belt can be tightened but
page 5‑12. belt could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor.
2. Put the child restraint on if necessary.
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and back‐
and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3‑26 for more
may be helpful to use your knee information.
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Cupholders

Compartments Cupholders are in the center
console.
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cupholders may be located in the

second row seat armrest. To
There may be a storage
access, pull the armrest down.
compartment on the instrument
panel. Pull the handle to open.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever.
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage Additional Storage

Features
Cargo Tie-Downs
Pull up on the latch (A) and slide the

center console armrest to adjust the
The center console storage has a position. Return the armrest to the
storage area under the armrest. rear position to access the
Pull up on the latch (A) to access. storage area.
There may be an auxiliary jack
outlet and a USB port located in the On the driver side in the rear
center console. compartment is a retainer to hang
light items on.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑20.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11

Passenger Airbag Status
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Malfunction Information Displays

Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Driver Information
Controls Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Service Vehicle Soon
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Brake System Warning Vehicle Messages (Canada
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Base Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Vehicle Messages (Canada
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Uplevel and United
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Power Steering Warning Battery Voltage and Charging
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-29
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Indicators Traction Control System Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-29
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-18 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Cooling System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-30
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-30
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Reduced Engine Power Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-31
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-31
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Engine Coolant Temperature Daytime Running Lamps Object Detection System
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Ride Control System Controls 3. Pull or push the steering wheel

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 closer or away from you.
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-32
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Steering Wheel 4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-32 Adjustment
Starting the Vehicle Do not adjust the steering wheel
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 while driving.
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-33 Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-34
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down. For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles Horn

with a Bluetooth, OnStar,
or navigation system, press to Press a on the steering wheel
interact with those systems. See pad to sound the horn.
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑23
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) Windshield Wiper/Washer
on page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑29, the 3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
OnStar Owner's Guide, or the Turn the band up for more frequent
separate navigation manual for wipes or down for less frequent
more information. wipes.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to 9 (Off): Use to turn the windshield
silence the vehicle speakers only. wipers off.
Press again to turn the sound on. The windshield wiper lever is on
For vehicles with OnStar or
3 (Mist): For a single wipe,
the side of the steering column. briefly move the wiper lever down.
Bluetooth systems, press to reject With the ignition in ACC/ For several wipes, hold the wiper
an incoming call, or end a ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move lever down.
current call. the windshield wiper lever to select
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): the wiper speed.
blades before using them. If they
Turn to select an audio source. 2: Use for fast wipes. are frozen to the windshield,
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or 1: Use for slow wipes. carefully loosen or thaw them.
previous favorite radio station, CD, Damaged wiper blades should be
or MP3 track. replaced. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑28.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
increase the volume. Press − to
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
decrease the volume.
until the motor cools.
Wipe Parking Windshield Washer Compass

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ Pull the windshield wiper lever The vehicle may have a compass
OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2, toward you to spray windshield display in the Driver Information
or 3, they will immediately stop. washer fluid and activate the wipers. Center (DIC). The compass receives
If the windshield wiper lever is then The wipers will continue until the its heading and other information
lever is released or the maximum from the Global Positioning
moved to 9 before the driver door System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
wash time is reached.
is opened, or within 10 minutes, the and vehicle speed information.
wipers will restart and move to the When the windshield wiper lever is
base of the windshield. released, additional wipes may Avoid covering the GPS antenna,
occur depending on how long the located on the roof, for long periods
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ of time with objects that may
windshield washer had been
OFF during a windshield wash, the interfere with the antenna's ability to
activated. See Washer Fluid on
wipers will stop when they reach the receive a satellite signal. The
page 10‑22 for information on filling
base of the windshield. compass system is designed to
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir. operate for a certain number of
miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
{ WARNING satellites. When the compass
In freezing weather, do not use display shows CAL, drive the
the washer until the windshield is vehicle for a short distance in an
warmed. Otherwise the washer open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
fluid can form ice on the
will automatically determine when
windshield, blocking your vision.
the GPS signal is restored and
provide a heading again.
See Compass Messages on 3. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Power Outlets

page 5‑29 for more information on knob to adjust the highlighted
the messages that may be number. The accessory power outlets can be
displayed for the compass. used to plug in electrical equipment,
4. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
knob to select the next number.
Clock There is one accessory power outlet
5. To save the time and return to located on the center floor console
The infotainment system controls the Time Settings menu, press and one on the rear of the center
are used to access the time and the BACK button at any time or floor console. These outlets are
date settings through the menu press the MENU or MENU/SEL powered when the key is in ON/
system. The clock menu can be knob after adjusting the minutes. RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until
only be used with the radio on while
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format the driver door is opened within
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
See Operation on page 7‑6 for 1. Press the CONFIG button and See Retained Accessory Power
information about how to use the select Time Settings. (RAP) on page 9‑23.
menu system. For vehicles with a
navigation system, see the separate 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
navigation manual. 3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to select the 12 hour or
Setting the Time
24 hour display format.
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings.
2. Select Set Time.
Remove the cover to access and When adding electrical equipment, Cigarette Lighter
replace when not in use. be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the For vehicles with a cigarette lighter,
Notice: Leaving electrical it is located on the front floor
equipment plugged in for an equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9‑55. console.
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the Notice: Hanging heavy To activate the cigarette lighter,
battery. Always unplug electrical equipment from the power outlet push it into the heating element and
equipment when not in use and can cause damage not covered let go. When the lighter is ready it
do not plug in equipment that by the vehicle warranty. The will pop back out.
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere power outlets are designed for Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
rating. accessory power plugs only, such in while it is heating does not let
Certain electrical accessories may as cell phone charge cords. the lighter back away from the
not be compatible with the heating element when it is hot.
accessory power outlet and could Damage from overheating can
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. occur to the lighter or heating
If a problem is experienced, see element, or a fuse could be
your dealer. blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
For vehicles with a removable Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
ashtray, the ashtray can be placed lights work together to indicate a
into the front console cupholders. Indicators problem with the vehicle.
To open the ashtray, lift the lid of the Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
ashtray. After using, close the lid. signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
To empty the ashtray for cleaning, to cause an expensive repair or
slightly turn the upper part of the shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
ashtray counterclockwise and warning lights and gauges could
remove it. to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Notice: If papers, pins, or other Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
flammable items are put in the could be a problem with a vehicle
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other function. Some warning lights come
smoking materials could ignite on briefly when the engine is started
them and possibly damage the to indicate they are working.
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Instrument Cluster
English Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the The trip odometer can show how far
vehicle's speed in either kilometers the vehicle has been driven since
per hour (km/h) or miles per the trip odometer was last reset.
hour (mph). The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Odometer Center (DIC). See Driver
The odometer shows how far the Information Center (DIC) on
vehicle has been driven, in either page 5‑23 for more information.
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant
Tachometer
odometer. The digital odometer will The tachometer displays the engine
read 999,999 if it is turned back. speed in revolutions per
If the vehicle needs a new odometer minute (rpm). When the ignition is on, the fuel
installed, it must be set to the Notice: If the engine is operated gauge indicates about how much
mileage total of the old odometer. with the tachometer in the shaded fuel is left in the tank.
If that is not possible, then it must warning area, the vehicle could An arrow on the fuel gauge
be set at zero and a label must be be damaged, and the damages indicates the side of the vehicle the
put on the driver door to show the would not be covered by the fuel door is on.
old mileage reading when the new vehicle warranty. Do not operate
odometer was installed. A FUEL LEVEL LOW message may
the engine with the tachometer in
appear in the Driver Information
the shaded warning area.
Center (DIC) and a single chime
sounds. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑31 for
more information.
Here are four things that some Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Temperature Gauge Driver Safety Belt Reminder
. At the service station, the fuel Light
pump shuts off before the gauge There is a driver safety belt
reads full. reminder light on the instrument
. It takes a little more or less fuel panel cluster.
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while When the vehicle is started, this
turning a corner or speeding up. This gauge shows the engine light flashes and a chime may come
coolant temperature. on to remind the driver to fasten
. The gauge takes a few seconds their safety belt. Then the light stays
to stabilize after the ignition is If the indicator needle moves to on solid until the belt is buckled.
turned on, and will go back to the hot side of the gauge toward
empty when the ignition is the H or shaded area, the engine is This cycle may continue several
turned off. too hot. times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
If the vehicle has been operated vehicle is moving.
under normal driving conditions, pull
off the road, stop the vehicle, and If the driver safety belt is buckled,
turn off the engine as soon as neither the light nor the chime
possible. comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt

Reminder Light reminder light and chime may turn
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop, or other
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove The airbag readiness light comes on
the object from the seat or buckle and stays on for several seconds
the safety belt. when the vehicle is started. Then
When the vehicle is started, this the light goes out.
light flashes and a chime may come Airbag Readiness Light
on to remind front passengers to This light shows if there is an { WARNING
fasten their safety belt. Then the electrical problem. The system
light stays on solid until the belt is check includes the airbag sensor(s), If the airbag readiness light stays
buckled. passenger sensing system, the on after the vehicle is started or
pretensioners, the airbag modules, comes on while driving, it means
This cycle continues several times if
the front passenger remains or the wiring, and the crash sensing the airbag system might not be
becomes unbuckled while the and diagnostic module. For more working properly. The airbags in
vehicle is moving. information on the airbag system, the vehicle might not inflate in a
see Airbag System on page 3‑19. crash, or they could even inflate
If the front passenger safety belt is without a crash. To help avoid
buckled, neither the chime nor the injury, have the vehicle serviced
light comes on.
right away.
Passenger Airbag Status as a system check. If you use If, after several seconds, both status
remote start, if equipped, to start the indicator lights remain on, or if there
Indicator vehicle, you may not see the system are no lights at all, there may be a
The vehicle has a passenger check. Then, after several seconds, problem with the lights or the
sensing system. See Passenger the status indicator will light either passenger sensing system. See
Sensing System on page 3‑26 for ON or OFF, or the on or off symbol your dealer for service.
important safety information. The to let you know the status of the
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
front outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag.
{ WARNING
If the word ON or the on symbol is If the airbag readiness light ever
lit on the passenger airbag status comes on and stays on, it means
indicator, it means that the front that something may be wrong
outboard passenger frontal airbag with the airbag system. To help
and knee airbag are allowed to avoid injury to yourself or others,
inflate. have the vehicle serviced right
United States away. See Airbag Readiness
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status Light on page 5‑11 for more
indicator, it means that the information, including important
passenger sensing system has safety information.
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
Charging System Light Malfunction

Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors the operation
of the vehicle to ensure emissions This light should come on when the
are at acceptable levels, to produce ignition is on, but the engine is not
a cleaner environment. This light running, as a check to show it is
The charging system light comes on comes on when the vehicle is
briefly when the ignition is turned working. If it does not, have the
placed in ON/RUN for key access or vehicle serviced by your dealer.
on, but the engine is not running, as Service Only Mode for keyless
a check to show the light is working. access, as a check to show it is If the malfunction indicator lamp
The light turns off when the engine working. If it does not, have the comes on and stays on while the
is started. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. engine is running, this indicates that
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Ignition Positions (Key Access) there is an OBD II problem and
If the light stays on, or comes on on page 9‑15 or Ignition Positions service is required.
while driving, there could be a (Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
problem with the electrical charging more information.
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Malfunctions often are indicated by Modifications to these systems If the light continues to flash, when
the system before any problem is could lead to costly repairs not it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
apparent. Being aware of the light covered by the vehicle warranty. Find a safe place to park. Turn the
can prevent more serious damage This could also result in a failure vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,
to the vehicle. This system assists to pass a required Emission and restart the engine. If the light is
the dealer technician in correctly Inspection/Maintenance test. See still flashing, follow the previous
diagnosing any malfunction. Accessories and Modifications on steps and see your dealer for
Notice: If the vehicle is page 10‑3. service as soon as possible.
continually driven with this light This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission
on, the emission controls might malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has
not work as well, the vehicle fuel Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle.
economy might not be as good, has been detected. A misfire Diagnosis and service might be
and the engine might not run as increases vehicle emissions and required.
smoothly. This could lead to could damage the emission control The following may correct an
costly repairs that might not be system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emissions system malfunction:
covered by the vehicle warranty. and service might be required. . Check that the fuel cap is fully
Notice: Modifications made to the To prevent more serious damage to installed. See Filling the Tank on
engine, transmission, exhaust, the vehicle: page 9‑46. The diagnostic
intake, or fuel system of the system can determine if the fuel
vehicle or the replacement of the . Reduce vehicle speed.
cap has been left off or
original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations. improperly installed. A loose or
those of the same Tire missing fuel cap allows fuel to
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
evaporate into the atmosphere.
affect the vehicle's emission . If towing a trailer, reduce the A few driving trips with the cap
controls and can cause this amount of cargo being hauled as properly installed should turn
light to come on. soon as it is possible. the light off.

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass
used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs inspection if:
the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may Some local governments may have . The malfunction indicator lamp is
cause stalling after start-up, programs to inspect the on-vehicle on with the engine running, or if
stalling when the vehicle is emission control equipment. For the the light does not come on when
changed into gear, misfiring, inspection, the emission system test the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
hesitation on acceleration, equipment is connected to the while the engine is off.
or stumbling on acceleration. vehicle’s Data Link . The OBD II (On-Board
These conditions might go away Connector (DLC). Diagnostics) system determines
once the engine is warmed up. that critical emission control
If one or more of these conditions systems have not been
occurs, change the fuel brand used. completely diagnosed. The
It will require at least one full tank of vehicle would be considered not
the proper fuel to turn the light off. ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has
See Recommended Fuel on recently been replaced or run
page 9‑44. down. The diagnostic system is
The DLC is under the instrument
If none of the above have made the panel to the left of the steering designed to evaluate critical
light turn off, your dealer can check wheel. See your dealer if assistance emission control systems during
the vehicle. The dealer has the is needed. normal driving. This can take
proper test equipment and several days of routine driving.
diagnostic tools to fix any If this has been done and the
mechanical or electrical problems vehicle still does not pass the
that might have developed. inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
Service Vehicle Soon Brake System Warning

Light Light
{ WARNING
The vehicle brake system consists The brake system might not be
of two hydraulic circuits. If one working properly if the brake
circuit is not working, the remaining system warning light is on.
circuit can still work to stop the Driving with the brake system
vehicle. For normal braking warning light on can lead to a
performance, both circuits need to crash. If the light is still on after
be working. the vehicle has been pulled off
For vehicles with this light, it comes the road and carefully stopped,
If the warning light comes on, there
on if a condition exists that may have the vehicle towed for
is a brake problem. Have the brake
require the vehicle to be taken in service.
system inspected right away.
for service.
Vehicles not equipped with a light If the light comes on while driving, a
display a SERVICE VEHICLE chime sounds. Pull off the road and
SOON message. stop. The pedal might be harder to
See Service Vehicle Messages on push or go closer to the floor.
page 5‑32 for more information. It might also take longer to stop.
Metric English If the light is still on, have the
If the light comes on, take the vehicle towed for service. See
vehicle to your dealer for service as The brake indicator light should Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑83.
soon as possible. come on briefly as the engine is
For vehicles with an uplevel cluster, started. If it does not come on have
this light comes on in the Driver the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Information Center (DIC).
Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning Power Steering Warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
(ABS) Warning Light brakes, but not antilock brakes.
Light
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑16.
See Brake System Messages on
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) page 5‑29 for all brake‐related DIC This light comes on briefly when the
light comes on briefly when the messages. ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a
engine is started. check to show it is working.
If the light does not come on, have it Up-Shift Light If it does not come on have the
fixed so it will be ready to warn if vehicle serviced by your dealer.
there is a problem. If this light stays on, or comes on
If the ABS light comes on and stays while driving, the system may not be
on while driving, stop as soon as working. If this happens, see your
possible and turn the ignition off. dealer for service.
Start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light stays on after
driving at a speed above 20 km/h The vehicle may have an up-shift
(13 mph), see your dealer for light. It shows when to shift to the
service. A chime may also sound next higher gear for best fuel
when the light comes on steady. economy.
See Manual Transmission on
Traction Off Light If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not If the TCS is off, the system does
limited. Adjust driving accordingly. not assist in controlling the vehicle.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak® systems and the warning light
System on page 9‑38 for more turns off.
information. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®
StabiliTrak® OFF Light System on page 9‑38 for more
This light comes on briefly while information
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your Traction Control System
dealer. If the system is working (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
normally, the indicator light then
turns off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS) This light comes on briefly while
has been turned off by pressing and starting the engine. If it does not,
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak have the vehicle serviced by your
button. dealer.
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF This light comes on when the The StabiliTrak system or the
light come on when StabiliTrak is StabiliTrak system is turned off. Traction Control System (TCS)
turned off. If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction indicator/warning light comes on
Control System (TCS) is also off. briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
If the light is on and not flashing, the Tire Pressure Light Stop as soon as possible, and
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak inflate the tires to the pressure value
system have been disabled. A DIC shown on the Tire and Loading
message may display. Check the Information label. See Tire Pressure
DIC messages to determine which on page 10‑49 for more information.
feature(s) is no longer functioning
and whether the vehicle requires When the Light Flashes First and
service. Then Is On Steady
If the indicator/warning light is on If the light flashes for about a minute

For vehicles with the Tire Pressure and then stays on, there may be a
and flashing, the TCS and/or the Monitor System (TPMS), this light
StabiliTrak system is actively problem with the TPMS. If the
comes on briefly when the engine is problem is not corrected, the light
working. started. It provides information will come on at every ignition cycle.
See StabiliTrak® System on about tire pressures and the TPMS. See Tire Pressure Monitor
page 9‑38 and Traction Control When the Light Is On Steady Operation on page 10‑52 for more
System (TCS) on page 9‑37 for information.
more information. This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC)
tire pressure message may also
display. See Vehicle Messages
(Canada Base Level) on page 5‑28
or Vehicle Messages (Canada
Uplevel and United States) on
Engine Oil Pressure Light Low Fuel Warning Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come
Someone could be burned. Check on briefly as the engine is started.
the oil as soon as possible and If it does not come on, have the
have the vehicle serviced. vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through
maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle
engine. The repairs would not be could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See This light comes on for a few
covered by the vehicle warranty.
your dealer. seconds when the ignition is turned
Always follow the maintenance
on as a check to indicate it is
schedule for changing engine oil.
working. If it does not come on,
have it fixed.
The low fuel warning light (A) comes
on and a chime sounds when the
vehicle is low on fuel. The light turns
off when fuel is added to the
fuel tank.
For vehicles with a Driver Reduced Engine Power The vehicle can be driven at a
Information Center (DIC), see Driver reduced speed when the reduced
Information Center (DIC) on
Light engine power light is on but
page 5‑23 for more information. acceleration and speed might be
reduced. The performance could be
Security Light reduced until the next time the
vehicle is driven. If this light stays
on, see your dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
The reduced engine power light High-Beam On Light

should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not come
on have the vehicle serviced by
The immobilizer light should come your dealer.
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the This light, along with the service
vehicle serviced by your dealer. engine soon light, displays when a
If the system is working normally, noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
the indicator light turns off. performance occurs. Stop the The high‐beam on light comes on
vehicle and turn off the ignition. when the high-beam headlamps are
If the light stays on and the engine Wait for 10 seconds and restart the
does not start, there could be a in use.
vehicle. This might correct the
problem with the theft-deterrent condition. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
system. See Immobilizer Operation Changer on page 6‑2 for more
on page 2‑14 for more information. information.
Daytime Running Lamps Front Fog Lamp Light Lamps On Reminder

(DRL) Indicator Light
For vehicles with front fog lamps, The lamps on reminder light comes
This light turns on whenever the this light comes on when the front on when the lights are in use.
Daytime Running Lamps are in use. fog lamps are in use.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) The light goes out when the front
on page 6‑2 for more information. fog lamps are turned off. See Front
Fog Lamps on page 6‑4 for more
information.
Cruise Control Light Door Ajar Light Information Displays

Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). The DIC
displays information about your
The cruise control light is white For vehicles equipped with this light, vehicle. It also displays warning
whenever the cruise control is set, it comes on when a door is open or messages if a system problem is
and turns green when the cruise not securely latched. Before driving, detected. See Vehicle Messages
control is active. check that all doors are properly (Canada Base Level) on page 5‑28
closed. See Door Ajar Messages on or Vehicle Messages (Canada
The light turns off when the cruise Uplevel and United States) on
control is turned off. See Cruise page 5‑29 for more information.
page 5‑28 for more information. All
Control on page 9‑40 for more For vehicles with an uplevel cluster, messages appear in the DIC display
information. this light comes on in the Driver located in the center of the
Information Center (DIC). instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using the
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever
located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The DIC displays
trip, fuel, and warning messages if a
system problem is detected.
DIC Buttons The following is a list of all possible The Average Fuel Economy display
menu items: shows the approximate average
. Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
Economy, Average Vehicle or miles per gallon (mpg).
Speed This number is based on the
number of L/100 km (mpg)
. Speed, Fuel Range, Average recorded since the last time this
Fuel Economy menu item was reset. This display
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear . Instantaneous Fuel Economy is shown as . c L/100 km (mpg).
the menu item displayed. . Best Average Fuel Economy Reset the average consumption by
pressing SET/CLR when it is
B. w x (Thumbwheel): Use to . Fuel Used displayed.
scroll through the menus. . Timer This screen also displays the
C. MENU: Press to display the average vehicle speed of the
. Digital Speed
Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)
Information menu. This button is . Navigation or miles per hour (mph). This
also used to return to or exit the average is based on the various
Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel
last screen displayed on vehicle speeds recorded since the
Economy, Average Vehicle Speed
the DIC. last reset. This display is shown
This displays the current distance
Trip/Fuel Menu Items traveled, in either kilometers (km) or as c km/h (mph). Reset the
miles (mi), from the last reset for the average speed by pressing
Press MENU on the turn signal SET/CLR when it is displayed.
lever until Trip/Fuel Information trip odometer. The trip odometer can
menu displays. Use w x to scroll be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the SET/CLR button while
through the menu items. Not all
the trip odometer display is
items are available on every vehicle.
showing.
Speed, Fuel Range, Average Fuel This number reflects only the The center bar graph displays the
Economy fuel economy that the vehicle instantaneous fuel economy.
The top of this display includes has right now and changes Quickly press the SET/CLR button
a digital speedometer. The frequently as driving conditions to display a page for selecting one
speedometer shows how fast change. This display is shown of the distance options. Move the
the vehicle is moving in either as . L/100 km (mpg). This display up/down arrow to choose the
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles cannot be reset. selection, and SET/CLR to change
per hour (mph). The speedometer the setting.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
cannot be reset. When viewing best AFE, a several
The instantaneous fuel economy second press and hold of SET/CLR
In the center of the page is the display shows the current fuel
fuel range display. This shows the will reset the best value. The best
economy in liters per 100 kilometers value will show “- - -” until the
approximate distance the vehicle
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon selected distance has been
can be driven without refueling. (mpg). This number reflects only the
The fuel range estimate is based on traveled.
fuel economy that the vehicle has
an average of the vehicle's fuel right now and changes frequently as The display provides feedback on
economy over recent driving history how current driving behavior in the
driving conditions change. Unlike
and the amount of fuel remaining in average economy, this display bar graph affects the running
the fuel tank. This display is shown cannot be reset. average in the left display and how
as l . km (mi). Fuel range cannot well recent driving compares to the
be reset. Best Average Fuel Economy best that has been achieved.
Also included on this page is an The right hand side displays the Fuel Used
instantaneous fuel economy display. best average fuel economy (AFE)
that is achieved for a selected This display shows the approximate
The instantaneous fuel economy liters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel that
display shows the current fuel distance. The left hand side displays
a running average of fuel economy have been used since last reset.
economy in liters per 100 kilometers The fuel used can be reset by
(L/100 km) or miles per for the most recently traveled
selected distance. pressing the SET/CLR button while
gallon (mpg). the Fuel Used display is showing.
Timer Navigation Units

This display can be used as a timer. This display is used for the OnStar Move w x to change between
To start the timer, press SET/CLR or navigation system Turn-by-Turn Metric or US when the Unit display
while Timer is displayed. The guidance. See the OnStar Owner's is active. Press SET/CLR to confirm
display will show the amount of time Guide or the navigation manual, the setting. On some models, you
that has passed since the timer was if the vehicle has navigation, for will have to select 1, 2, or 3 for the
last reset, not including time the more information. Unit display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 is
ignition is off. Time will continue to US units, and 3 is metric units. This
be counted as long as the ignition is Vehicle Information Menu
Items will change the displays on the
on, even if another display is being cluster and DIC to the type of
shown on the DIC. The timer will Press MENU on the turn signal measurements you select.
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes, lever until Vehicle Information menu
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after Tire Pressure
is displayed. Use w x to scroll
which the display will return to zero. The display may show a vehicle
through the menu items. Not all
To stop the timer, press SET/CLR with the approximate pressures of
items are available on every vehicle.
briefly while Timer is displayed. To all four tires. Tire pressure is
The following is a list of all possible
reset the timer to zero, press and displayed in either kilopascal (kPa)
menu items:
hold SET/CLR. or in pounds per square inch (psi).
. Units On some models, this display only
Digital Speed
. Tire Pressure allows for matching of the TPMS
The speedometer shows how fast sensors. In this case, the display
the vehicle is moving in either . Remaining Oil Life
will show TIRE LEARN. See Tire
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles . Coolant Temperature Pressure Monitor System on
per hour (mph). The speedometer page 10‑50 and Tire Pressure
cannot be reset.
. Battery Voltage
Monitor Operation on page 10‑52 for
. Blank Display more information.
Remaining Oil Life Remember, the Oil Life display must The vehicle's charging system
This display shows an estimate of be reset after each oil change. It will regulates voltage based on the state
the oil's remaining useful life. not reset itself. Also, be careful not of the battery. The battery voltage
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is to reset the Oil Life display can fluctuate while viewing this
displayed, that means 99% of the accidentally at any time other than information on the DIC. This is
current oil life remains. This display when the oil has just been changed. normal. See Charging System Light
It cannot be reset accurately until on page 5‑13 for more information.
may be shown as : %. the next oil change. To reset the If there is a problem with the battery
When the remaining oil life is low, engine oil life system press the charging system, the DIC will
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON SET/CLR button while the Oil Life display a message. See Battery
message, or Code 82, will appear display is active. See Engine Oil Voltage and Charging Messages on
on the display. See Engine Oil Life System on page 10‑12. page 5‑28.
Messages on page 5‑30 and Coolant Temperature Blank Display
“Vehicle Messages (Canadian Base
Level)” following. The oil should be This display, available on some This display shows no information.
changed as soon as possible. See vehicles, shows the temperature of
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. In addition the engine cooling system fluid in
to the engine oil life system either degrees Celsius (°C) or
monitoring the oil life, additional degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
maintenance is recommended in the Battery Voltage
Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Maintenance Schedule This display, available on some
on page 11‑3 for more information. vehicles, shows the current battery
voltage. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may read
Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts.
Vehicle Messages 35: Replace battery in radio remote All messages should be taken
control seriously. Clearing messages will
not correct the problem.
Vehicle Messages 53: Tighten gas cap
On the Canadian uplevel cluster
(Canada Base Level) 68: Service power steering
and on vehicles sold in the United
DIC messages display when the 75: Service air conditioner States, vehicle messages are
status of the vehicle has changed 82: Change engine oil soon displayed as text. The messages
and action may be needed to and information about them follow.
correct the condition. Multiple 84: Engine power is reduced
messages appear one after another. 95: Service airbag Battery Voltage and
Press any of the DIC buttons on the Charging Messages
turn signal lever to acknowledge Vehicle Messages
and clear them from the display. (Canada Uplevel and BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
More urgent messages cannot be United States) This message displays when the
cleared from the DIC display. vehicle has detected that the battery
All messages should be taken DIC messages display when the voltage is dropping beyond a
seriously. Clearing messages will status of the vehicle has changed reasonable point. The battery saver
not correct the problem. and action may be needed to system starts reducing certain
correct the condition. Multiple features of the vehicle that you may
On the Canadian base level cluster,
messages appear one after another. be able to notice. At the point that
vehicle messages appear as code
numbers. Press any of the DIC buttons on the features are disabled, this message
turn signal lever to acknowledge is displayed. It means that the
25: Left front turn indicator failure vehicle is trying to save the charge
and clear them from the display.
26: Left rear turn indicator failure More urgent messages cannot be in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
cleared from the DIC display. accessories to allow the battery to
27: Right front turn indicator failure
recharge.
28: Right rear turn indicator failure
LOW BATTERY Compass Messages Door Ajar Messages

This message is displayed when the CAL DOOR(S) OPEN
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10‑25 for more information. This message is displayed when the A vehicle symbol will be displayed
compass needs to be calibrated. on the DIC showing which door is
SERVICE BATTERY See Compass on page 5‑4. open along with this message.
CHARGING SYSTEM Close the door completely.
––
This message is displayed when HOOD OPEN
there is a fault in the battery Two dashes will be displayed if the
charging system. Take the vehicle compass needs service. See your This message will display when the
to your dealer for service. dealer for service. hood is open. Close the hood
completely.
Brake System Messages Cruise Control Messages TRUNK OPEN
BRAKE FLUID LOW APPLY BRAKE BEFORE This message will display when the
CRUISE trunk is open. Close the trunk
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake If this message displays when completely.
Fluid on page 10‑23. attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake pedal and try again.
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message is displayed as a
reminder that the parking brake is This message displays when the
on. Release it before you attempt cruise control is set and shows the
to drive. speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑40 for more
information.
Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED — Center (DIC) on page 5‑23 for
STOP ENGINE information on how to reset the
Messages system. See Engine Oil on
This message displays and a page 10‑9 and Maintenance
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH continuous chime sounds if the
ENGINE TEMP Schedule on page 11‑3 for more
engine cooling system reaches information.
This message displays when the unsafe temperatures for operation.
engine coolant becomes hotter than Stop and turn off the vehicle as OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
the normal operating temperature. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid ENGINE
To avoid added strain on a hot severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled This message displays if low oil
engine, the air conditioning pressure levels occur. Stop the
compressor automatically turns off. to a safe operating temperature.
vehicle as soon as safely possible
When the coolant temperature HIGH COOLANT and do not operate it until the cause
returns to normal, the air of the low oil pressure has been
conditioning compressor turns back TEMPERATURE
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
on. You can continue to drive the This message displays if the coolant possible and have the vehicle
vehicle. temperature is hot. See Engine serviced by your dealer.
If this message continues to appear, Overheating on page 10‑19.
have the system repaired by your Engine Power Messages
dealer as soon as possible to avoid Engine Oil Messages
damage to the engine. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
ENGINE OVERHEATED — This message displays when the
This message displays when the vehicle's engine power is reduced.
IDLE ENGINE engine oil needs to be changed. Reduced engine power can affect
This message displays when the When you change the engine oil, be the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
engine coolant temperature is too sure to reset the Oil Life System. If this message is on, but there is no
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to See Engine Oil Life System on reduction in performance, proceed
idle until it cools down. page 10‑12 and Driver Information to your destination.
The performance may be reduced Key and Lock Messages AUTOMATIC LIGHT
the next time the vehicle is driven. CONTROL OFF
The vehicle may be driven at a NO REMOTE DETECTED
reduced speed while this message This message is displayed when the
This message displays when the automatic light control has been
is on, but maximum acceleration transmitter battery is weak on
and speed may be reduced. turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
vehicles with keyless access. See System on page 6‑3.
Anytime this message stays on, “Starting the Vehicle with a Low
the vehicle should be taken to your Transmitter Battery” under Remote XXX TURN INDICATOR
dealer for service as soon as Keyless Entry (RKE) System FAILURE
possible. Operation on page 2‑3 for more When one of the turn signals is out,
information. this message displays to show
Fuel System Messages
REPLACE BATTERY IN which bulb needs to be replaced.
FUEL LEVEL LOW REMOTE KEY See Bulb Replacement on
page 10‑29 and Replacement Bulbs
This message displays when the This message displays when the on page 10‑34 for more information
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as battery in the Remote Keyless Entry on turn signal bulb replacement.
soon as possible. (RKE) transmitter needs to be
TIGHTEN GAS CAP replaced. TURN SIGNAL ON
This message is displayed if the
This message displays when the Lamp Messages turn signal has been left on. Turn off
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
the turn signal.
fuel cap. AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON
This message is displayed when the
automatic light control has been
turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 6‑3.
Object Detection System Ride Control System Security Messages

Messages Messages THEFT ATTEMPTED
PARK ASSIST OFF SERVICE TRACTION This message displays if the vehicle
This message displays when the CONTROL detects a tamper condition.
park assist system has been turned This message displays when there
off or when there is a temporary is a problem with the Traction Service Vehicle Messages
condition causing the system to be Control System (TCS). See Traction
disabled. See Ultrasonic Parking
SERVICE AC SYSTEM
Control System (TCS) on
Assist on page 9‑42. page 9‑37. This message displays if there is a
problem with the air conditioning
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SERVICE STABILITRAK system. Take the vehicle to your
This message displays if there is a This message displays if there is a dealer for service.
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear problem with the StabiliTrak system. SERVICE POWER STEERING
Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do See StabiliTrak® System on
not use this system to help you page 9‑38. This message displays if there is a
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist problem with the power steering
on page 9‑42 for more information. Airbag System Messages system. Take the vehicle to your
See your dealer for service. dealer for service.
SERVICE AIRBAG
SERVICE STEERING
This message displays if there is a COLUMN LOCK
problem with the airbag system.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for This message displays if there is a
service. problem with the steering column
lock. Take the vehicle to your dealer
for service.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Tire Messages The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
This message displays if there is a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR Pressure Light on page 5‑19.
problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
SYSTEM If a tire pressure message appears
This message displays if there is a on the DIC, stop as soon as you
Starting the Vehicle problem with the Tire Pressure can. Inflate the tires by adding air
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire until the tire pressure is equal to the
Messages Pressure Monitor Operation on values shown on the Tire and
TURN STEERING WHEEL page 10‑52 for more information. Loading Information label. See Tires
TURN KEY OFF THEN ON on page 10‑42, Vehicle Load Limits
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE on page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure on
This message displays when the This message displays when the page 10‑49.
steering column is locked. Try system is learning new tires. See
turning the steering wheel while You can receive more than one tire
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on pressure message at a time. To
turning the vehicle off and then back page 10‑52 for more information.
on to unlock the steering column. read the other messages that may
TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD have been sent at the same time,
TURN STEERING WHEEL AIR TO TIRE press the SET/CLR button. The DIC
START VEHICLE AGAIN also shows the tire pressure values.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure See Driver Information Center (DIC)
This message displays when the Monitor System (TPMS), this on page 5‑23.
steering column is locked. Try message displays when the
turning the steering wheel while
starting the vehicle to unlock the
pressure in one or more of the Transmission Messages
vehicle's tires is low.
steering column. SERVICE TRANSMISSION
There is also an icon with the
warning that will indicate the This message displays if there is a
location of the low tire. problem with the transmission.
See your dealer.
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE Vehicle button until Vehicle is highlighted

ENGINE on vehicles with a navigation
Personalization system only.
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in The audio system controls are used 3. Press the center of the MENU or
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the to access the personalization MENU/SEL knob to select the
transmission fluid temperature high menus for customizing vehicle Vehicle Settings menu. The key
can cause damage to the vehicle. features. must be in the run position.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to CONFIG (Configuration): Press to The following list of menu items may
allow the transmission to cool. This access the Configuration be available:
message clears when the fluid Settings menu.
temperature reaches a safe level.
. Climate and Air Quality
MENU or MENU/SEL: Press the . Comfort and Convenience
Vehicle Reminder center of this knob to enter the
menus and select menu items. Turn . Collision/Detection Systems
Messages the knob to scroll through the . Languages
menus.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE . Lighting
WITH CARE BACK: Press to exit or move
backward in a menu.
. Power Door Locks
This message displays when ice . Remote Locking, Unlocking,
conditions are possible. Entering the Personalization
Starting
Menus
STEERING COLUMN IS . Return to Factory Settings
LOCKED 1. Press CONFIG to access the
Configuration Settings menu. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
This message displays when the to highlight the menu. Press the
steering column is locked. 2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to select it. Each of the menus
knob to highlight Vehicle
is detailed in the following
Settings. Press the CONFIG
information.
Vehicles with a navigation system Air Quality Sensor Auto Defog

will display a checkmark to indicate This will allow you to select whether When turned on and high humidity
this feature is on. the system will operate at high or is detected, the climate control
Climate and Air Quality low sensitivity. Only vehicles with system may adjust to outside air
the automatic climate control will supply and turn on the air
If equipped, select the Climate and have this option. conditioner or the heater. The fan
Air Quality menu and the following speed may slightly increase to help
will be displayed: Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob when Air Quality Sensor is prevent fogging. When high
. Auto Fan Speed highlighted to open the menu. Turn humidity is no longer detected, the
the knob to highlight High Sensitivity system will return to its prior
. Air Quality Sensor
or Low Sensitivity. Press the BACK operation.
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
button to confirm the selection and Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
. Auto Defog move back to the last menu. knob when Auto Defog is
. Auto Rear Defog highlighted to open the menu. Turn
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats the knob to highlight On or Off.
Auto Fan Speed On vehicles with remote start and Press the BACK button to confirm
This will allow you to select the heated seats, the heated seats can the selection and move back to the
automatic fan speed. This feature be set to on or off. last menu.
sets the climate control fan speed to Press the MENU or MENU/SEL Auto Rear Defog
maintain the interior temperature. knob when Remote Start Auto Heat
Seats is highlighted to open the When on, this feature turns on the
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL rear defogger at vehicle start when
knob when Auto Fan Speed is menu. Turn the knob to highlight
On or Off. Press the BACK button to the interior temperature is cold and
highlighted to open the menu. Turn fog is likely. The auto rear defog
the knob to highlight High, Medium, confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu. function can be disabled by
or Low. Press the BACK button to pressing 1. When off, the feature
confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu. can be turned on by pressing 1.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Collision/Detection Systems Lighting

Climate Control Systems on
If equipped, select the Collision/ Select the Lighting menu and the
Detection Systems menu and following will be displayed:
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL Park Assist will be displayed. . Exit Lighting
knob when Auto Rear Defog is
highlighted to open the menu. Park Assist . Vehicle Locator Lights
Turn the knob to highlight On or Off. This allows the Ultrasonic Parking Exit Lighting
Press the knob to confirm the Assist feature, audible only, to be
selection and move back to the turned on or off. This allows the selection of how
last menu. long the exterior lamps stay on
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL when leaving the vehicle when it is
Comfort and Convenience knob when Park Assist is dark outside.
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Select the Comfort and On or Off. Press the knob to confirm Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
Convenience menu and Chime and go back to the last menu. knob when Exit Lighting is
Volume will be displayed. highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Languages Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,
Chime Volume
Select the Language menu and the or 2 Minutes. Press the BACK
This allows the selection of the button to confirm and go back to the
following will be displayed:
chime volume level. last menu.
. English
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL Vehicle Locator Lights
knob when Chime Volume is . Francais
highlighted. Turn the knob to select This allows the vehicle locator lights
. Espanol
Normal or High. Press the BACK to be turned on or off. When on, the
button to confirm and go back to the Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob headlamps and back‐up lamps will
last menu. to select the language. Press BACK flash when K is pressed.
to return to the last menu.
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press Even when this feature is off, the
knob when Vehicle Locator Lights is the knob to confirm and go back to driver is protected from accidental
highlighted to open the menu. Turn the last menu. lockouts when the key is in the
the MENU or MENU/SEL knob to ignition.
highlight On or Off. Press MENU or Delayed Door Lock
If Off is selected, the Unlocked Door
MENU/SEL to select On or Off. When on, this feature will delay the Anti Lock Out feature may be
Press the BACK button to confirm locking of the doors until enabled through an additional menu
the selection and move back to the five seconds after the last door is selection.
last menu. closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal delayed locking is in use. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
Power Door Locks Press either the power lock button knob when Unlocked Door Anti Lock
Select Power Door Locks and the or Q on the RKE transmitter twice to Out is highlighted to select On or
following will be displayed: override the delayed locking feature Off. Press BACK to return to the
and immediately lock all of the last menu.
. Auto Door Unlock
doors. Auto Door Lock
. Delayed Door Lock
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL This allows selection of which of the
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out knob when Delayed Door Lock is doors will automatically lock when
. Auto Door Lock highlighted to select On or Off. the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Press BACK to return to the
Auto Door Unlock last menu. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob when Auto Door Lock is
This allows selection of which of the
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out highlighted. Turn the knob to select
doors will automatically unlock when
When on, all doors will lock. The On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
driver door will then unlock if door and go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
locking is requested while the driver
knob when Auto Door Unlock is
door is open, and disable the
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Delayed Door Lock feature.
Remote Locking, Unlocking, Door Unlock or Remote Door Turn the knob to select On or Off.
Starting Unlock Press the knob to confirm and go
This allows selection of which doors back to the last menu.
Select Remote Locking, Unlocking,
Starting and the following will be will unlock when pressing K on the Remote Start
displayed (depending on the RKE transmitter. If equipped, this allows selection to
system): turn on or off Remote Start.
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
. Remote Lock Feedback knob when Door Unlock is Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
. Door Unlock or Remote Door highlighted. Turn the knob to select knob when Remote Start is
Unlock All Doors or Driver Door Only. When highlighted. Turn the knob to select
set to Driver Door Only, the driver On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback
door will unlock the first time K is and go back to the last menu.
. Remote Start pressed and all doors will unlock
Return to Factory Settings
Remote Lock Feedback when K is pressed a second time.
When set to All Doors, all of the Select Return to Factory Settings to
This allows selection of what type of doors will unlock at the first press of return all vehicle personalization to
feedback is given when locking the K. Press the knob to confirm and the default settings. Turn the knob
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. go back to the last menu. to select Yes or No. Press the knob
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL to confirm and go back to the
knob when Remote Lock Feedback Remote Unlock Light Feedback last menu.
is highlighted. Turn the knob to If equipped, this allows selection of
select Lights and Horn, Lights Only, what type of feedback is given when
Horn Only, or Off. Press the knob to unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
confirm and go back to the transmitter.
last menu. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob when Remote Unlock Light
Feedback is highlighted.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting The exterior lamp control has

four positions:
Exterior Lamp Controls O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
Exterior Lighting to turn the automatic light control off
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 or on again.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 headlamps on automatically at
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 normal brightness, together with
Daytime Running the following:
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Headlamp . Parking Lamps
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 . Taillamps
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3
Turn and Lane-Change
. License Plate Lamps
The exterior lamp control is located
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 . Instrument Panel Lights
on the instrument panel to the
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
outboard side of the steering . Sidemarker Lamps
Interior Lighting column.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the
Instrument Panel Illumination It controls the following systems: parking lamps on together with the
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 following:
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
. Headlamps
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 . Taillamps
. Taillamps
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 . License Plate Lamps
. Parking Lamps
Lighting Features . License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 . Sidemarker Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6 . Fog Lamps
6-2 Lighting
5 (Headlamps): Turns the Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass

headlamps on together with the Low-Beam Changer To flash the high beams, pull the
lamps listed below. A warning chime
turn signal/lane change lever all the
sounds if the driver door is opened
way toward you. Then release it.
when the ignition switch is off and
the headlamps are on.
.
Daytime Running
Parking Lamps
Lamps (DRL)
. Taillamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
. License Plate Lamps make it easier for others to see the
. Instrument Panel Lights 2 3 Headlamp High/Low‐Beam front of your vehicle during the day.
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane Fully functional daytime running
. Sidemarker Lamps lamps are required on all vehicles
change lever away from you to turn
# (Front Fog Lamps): For the high beams on. first sold in Canada.
vehicles with fog lamps, press to
turn the lamps on or off. Pull the lever toward you to return to
low beams.
See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.
When the lights are on, ; will be
lit. See Lamps On Reminder on
page 5‑22.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
DRL are on.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the A light sensor on top of the
high‐beam headlamps are on. instrument panel makes the DRL
work, so be sure it is not covered.
Lighting 6-3
The DRL system makes the To turn the DRL off or on again, turn or the headlamps will be on when
low‐beam headlamps come on at the exterior lamps control to the off they are not needed.
a reduced brightness when the position and then release. For The system may also turn on the
following conditions are met: vehicles first sold in Canada, the headlamps when driving through a
. The ignition is in the ON/ DRL cannot be turned off. parking garage or tunnel.
RUN mode.
Automatic Headlamp Hazard Warning Flashers
. The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO. System
. The engine is running. When it is dark enough outside and
the exterior lamps control is in the
When the DRL are on, only the automatic position, the headlamps
low‐beam headlamps, at a reduced come on automatically. See Exterior
level of brightness, will be on. The Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
panel, and other lamps will not
be on.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings. The
other lamps that come on with the
headlamps will also come on. | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
Press and momentarily hold this
When it is bright enough outside, button located on the instrument
the headlamps go off and the DRL The vehicle has a light sensor
located on top of the instrument panel above the climate control
come on. system, to make the front and rear
panel. Make sure it is not covered,
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
6-4 Lighting
This warns others that you are The lever returns to its starting The ignition must be on to turn on
having trouble. Press and position when it is released. the fog lamps.
momentarily hold again to turn the If after signaling a turn or lane # : Press to turn the fog lamps on
flashers off. change the arrow flashes rapidly or or off. An indicator light on the
does not come on, a signal bulb instrument panel cluster comes on
Turn and Lane-Change may be burned out. Have the bulbs when the fog lamps are on.
Signals replaced. If the bulb is not burned The fog lamps come on together
out, check the fuse. See Fuses and with the parking lamps.
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑35 for
more information. If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
Front Fog Lamps If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
back on again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
For vehicles with front fog lamps,
Raise or lower the lever until the the button is located on the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane outboard side of the instrument
change. The turn signal flashes panel.
three times.
Lighting 6-5
Interior Lighting Courtesy Lamps H (Door): Press to turn the lamps

on automatically when a door is
The courtesy lamps come on
Instrument Panel opened.
automatically when any door is
Illumination Control opened and the dome lamp is in ' (On): Press to turn on the
the door position. dome lamps.
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps
This feature controls the brightness

of the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is located to the left of The reading lamps are located in
the steering column on the the overhead console.
instrument panel. # or $ : Press the button near
D (Instrument Panel The dome lamp controls are located each lamp to turn it on or off.
Brightness): Move the in the headliner.
thumbwheel up or down and hold, to ( (Dome Lamp Override): Press
brighten or dim the instrument panel to turn the lamps off, even when a
controls and infotainment display door is open.
screen.
6-6 Lighting
Lighting Features Exit Lighting Battery Power Protection

The headlamps, taillamps, parking The battery saver feature is
Entry Lighting lamps, back‐up lamps, and license designed to protect the vehicle's
The headlamps, parking lamps, plate lamps come on at night, or in battery.
taillamps, and most of the interior areas with limited lighting, when the If some interior lights are left on
lights turn on briefly, when the key is removed from the ignition. and the ignition is turned off, the
The dome lamps also come on
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) K is when the key is removed from the
battery rundown protection system
pressed. After about 30 seconds the automatically turns the lamp off after
ignition. The exterior lamps and some time.
exterior lamps turn off, and then the dome lamps remain on after the
dome and remaining interior lights door is closed for a set amount of
will dim to off. Entry lighting can be time, then automatically turn off.
disabled manually by changing the
ignition out of the OFF position, The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
or by pressing the RKE Q button.
lamps control off.
This feature can be changed. The exit lighting feature can
See Vehicle Personalization on be changed. See Vehicle
page 5‑34. Personalization on page 5‑34.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
System Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-23
Introduction Bluetooth (Infotainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Bluetooth (Voice
Overview (Base Radio) . . . . . . . 7-3 Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Overview (Up-Level Radio) . . . 7-5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Trademarks and License
Radio Agreements
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Trademarks and License
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-18
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7-2 Infotainment System
Introduction To minimize taking your eyes off the Theft-Deterrent Feature

road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked: The theft-deterrent feature works by
Infotainment learning a portion of the Vehicle
. Become familiar with the Identification Number (VIN) to the
Read the following pages to operation and controls of the
become familiar with the audio infotainment system. The
audio system. infotainment system does not
system's features.
. Set up the tone, speaker operate if it is stolen or moved to
adjustments, and preset radio a different vehicle.
{ WARNING stations.
Taking your eyes off the road for For more information, see Defensive
extended periods could cause a Driving on page 9‑3.
crash resulting in injury or death The vehicle has Retained
to you or others. Do not give Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
extended attention to the audio system can be played
entertainment tasks while driving. even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
This system provides access to (RAP) on page 9‑23 for more
many audio and non‐audio listings. information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate navigation
manual.
Overview (Base Radio) D. T

. CD: Moves up one folder
level while playing an MP3.
E. k
. CD: Pauses playback, and
stops playback.
F. U
. CD: Moves back one folder
level while playing an MP3.
G. l
. Radio: Seeks the next
station.
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
H. CLOCK
A. O C. g . Opens the clock menu.
. Turns the system on or off . Radio: Seeks the previous
and adjusts the volume. station.
B. Buttons 1 to 6 . CD: Selects the previous
. Radio: Saves and selects track or rewinds within
favorite stations. a track.
I. INFO M. CD/AUX S. MENU or MENU/SEL

. Radio: Shows available . Selects the CD player or . Turn to open menus,
information about the an external audio source. highlight menu items,
current station. N. CD Slot or set numeric values
. CD: Shows available while in a menu.
. Insert a CD.
information about the . Press to select menu
current track. O. CONFIG items.
J. TONE . Opens the settings menu. . Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
. Opens the tone menu. P. 5\>
K. AS
. CD: Selects tracks.
. Opens the phone
. Radio: Opens the main menu. T. Y
autostore stations list. . Mutes the audio system. . Removes a disc from
L. BAND Q. FAV the CD slot.
. Changes the band while . Radio: Opens the
listening to the radio. favorites list.
. Selects the radio when R. BACK
listening to a different
audio source.
. Menu: Moves one
level back.
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
Overview (Up-Level Radio) D. k

. CD: Pauses playback, and
stops playback.
E. l
. Radio: Seeks the next
station.
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
F. CLOCK
. Opens the clock menu.
G. INFO
. Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
. CD: Shows available
A. O C. g information about the
current track.
. Turns the system on or off . Radio: Seeks the previous
and adjusts the volume. station. H. TONE
B. Buttons 1 to 6 . CD: Selects the previous
. Opens the tone menu.
. Radio: Saves and selects track or rewinds within
favorite stations. a track.
I. AS O. FAV Operation
. Radio: Opens the . Radio: Opens the
autostore stations list. favorites list.
Controls
The infotainment system is
J. BAND P. BACK
operated by using the pushbuttons,
. Changes the band while . Menu: Moves one multifunction knobs, menus shown
listening to the radio. level back. on the display, and steering wheel
. Selects the radio when . Character Input: Deletes controls, if equipped.
listening to a different the last character. Turning the System On or Off
audio source. Q. MENU or MENU/SEL O (Volume/Power): Press to turn
K. CD/AUX . Turn to open menus, the system on and off.
. Selects the CD player or highlight menu items,
Automatic Switch‐Off
an external audio source. or set numeric values
while in a menu. If the infotainment system has been
L. CD Slot
turned on after the ignition is turned
. Insert a CD.
. Press to select menu
off, the system will turn off
items.
M. CONFIG automatically after 10 minutes.
. Radio: Manually selects
. Opens the settings menu. radio stations. Volume Control
N. 5\> . CD: Selects tracks. O (Volume/Power): Turn to adjust
the volume.
. Opens the phone R. Y 5 / > (Phone/Mute): Press 5 / >
main menu. . Removes a disc from the to mute the infotainment system.
. Mutes the audio system. CD slot. Press 5 / > again, or turn the
O knob to cancel mute.
MENU System (Base Level) B. The angled arrow indicates that Turn to:
a submenu with more options is . Select a menu, or a menu
The menu system for the base level
available. option.
infotainment system appears on the
top half of the display screen. C. A single right arrow indicates . Select a value.
that the first submenu level is
Menu Icons active. Two right arrows indicate BACK: Press to:
The menu icons indicate the that the second submenu level . Exit a menu.
following: is active.
. Return from a submenu screen
D. The down arrow indicates that to the previous menu screen.
that more options are available
in the current menu.
. Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Controls
Selecting a Menu Option
The MENU or MENU/SEL knob and
the BACK button are used to 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
navigate the menu system. knob to scroll through available
menu options.
MENU or MENU/SEL Knob:
Press to: 2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to select the option.
. Enter the menu system.
Submenus
. Select or activate the menu
A. The up and down arrows option. A single right arrow indicates that a
indicate that the main menu submenu with other options is
is active.
. Confirm a set value. available.
. Turn a system setting on or off. A double right arrow indicates that a
second submenu with other options
is available.
Activating a Setting 2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Entering a Character Sequence

knob to change the current value
of the setting.
3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to confirm the setting.
Turning a Function On or Off
1. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL 1. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL

knob to enter the knob to enter the
displayed menu. displayed menu.
2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL 2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to display the setting. knob to adjust the highlighted
3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL character.
knob to activate the setting. knob to enter the 3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
displayed menu. knob to select the character.
Setting a Value
2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Press the BACK button to delete the
knob to turn the function on last character in the sequence or
or off. press and hold to delete the entire
character sequence.
knob to confirm the setting.

knob to enter the
displayed menu.
Menu System (Uplevel) BACK: Press to: Submenus

The menu system for the uplevel . Exit a menu. An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
infotainment system appears on . Return from a submenu screen the menu indicates that it has a
the display screen. to the previous menu screen. submenu with other options.
Controls . Delete the last character in a Activating a Setting
The MENU or MENU/SEL knob and sequence.
the BACK button are used to Selecting a Menu Option
navigate the menu system.
MENU or MENU/SEL Knob:
Press to:
. Enter the menu system.
. Select or activate the highlighted 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to highlight the setting.
menu option.
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL 2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
. Confirm a set value.
knob to move the knob to activate the setting.
. Turn a system setting on or off.
highlighted bar.
Turn to:
. Highlight a menu option. knob to select the highlighted
. Select a value. option.
Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence 3. Press and hold the MENU or
MENU/SEL button until the value
changes to 0.
Press the BACK button to go back
to the Tone Settings menu.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL 1. Press the TONE button.
knob to change the current value knob to highlight the character.
2. Select Treble, Midrange,
of the setting. 2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL or Bass.
2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL knob to select the character.
3. Select the value.
knob to confirm the setting. Press the BACK button to delete the
Turning a Function On or Off last character in the sequence or
to the Tone Settings menu.
press and hold to delete the entire
character sequence. Adjusting the Fader and Balance
Audio Settings 1. Press the TONE button.
The audio settings can be set for 2. Select Fader or Balance.
each radio band and each audio 3. Select the value.
player source.
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL To quickly reset an audio setting to the Tone Settings menu.
knob to highlight the function. value to 0:
2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL 1. Press the TONE button.
knob to turn the function on
2. Select the audio setting.
or off.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) 4. Select the number of available Maximum Startup Volume
For vehicles that have an equalizer: favorite pages. The maximum volume played when
1. Press the TONE button. 5. Press the BACK button to go the radio is first turned on can
back to the System be set.
2. Select EQ presets. Configuration menu. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select the setting. Auto Volume 2. Select Radio Settings.
Press the BACK button to go back The auto volume feature
to the Tone Settings menu. 3. Select Maximum Startup
automatically adjusts the radio Volume.
System Settings volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up 4. Select the setting.
Configuring the Number of or slows down, so that the volume 5. Press the BACK button to
Favorite Pages level is consistent. go back to the System
To configure the number of available The level of volume compensation Configuration menu.
favorite pages: can be selected, or the auto volume
1. Press the CONFIG button. feature can be turned off.
2. Select Radio Settings. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Radio Favorites. 2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the BACK button to
go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Radio RDS (Radio Data System) Selecting a Band

The radio may have RDS. The RDS Press the BAND button to choose
AM-FM Radio feature is available for use only on AM, FM, or XM, if equipped. The
FM stations that broadcast RDS last station that was playing starts
Control Buttons information. This feature only works playing again.
The buttons used to control the when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases, a Selecting a Station
radio are:
radio station could broadcast Seek Tuning
BAND: Press to turn the radio on incorrect information that causes the
and choose between AM, FM, and radio features to work improperly. If the radio station is not known:
XM™, if equipped. If this happens, contact the radio Briefly press g or l to
MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn to station. automatically search for the next
navigate the available menus and to While the radio is tuned to an available station. If a station is not
search for stations. FM-RDS station, the station name found, the radio switches to a more
INFO: Press to display additional or call letters display. sensitive search level. If a station
information that may be available for still is not found, the frequency that
Radio Menus was last active begins to play.
the current song.
Radio menus are available for AM
g or l : Press to search for
and FM.
If the radio station is known:
stations.
Press and hold g or l until the
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
FAV: Press to open the favorites station on the display is reached,
to open the main radio menu for
list and select the favorites page. then release the button.
that band.
1 to 6: Press to select preset Manual Tuning
stations.
AS (Autostore): Press to open the to select the frequency on the
autostore list. display.
Favorites List To search for a programming type To cancel the station search, press
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ determined by station: the MENU or MENU/SEL knob.
SEL knob. 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ Storing a Station as a Favorite
2. Select Favorites List. SEL knob.
Stations from all bands can be
3. Select the station. 2. Select FM category list. A list of stored in any order in the favorite
all programming types available pages.
Station Lists displays.
Up to six stations can be stored in
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ 3. Select the programming type. each favorite page and the number
SEL knob. A list of stations that transmit of available favorite pages can
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All programming of the selected be set.
receivable stations in the current type displays.
Storing Stations
reception area are displayed. If a 4. Select the station.
station list has not been created, To store the station to a position in
The category lists are updated when the list, press the corresponding
an automatic station search the station lists are updated.
is done. button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
3. Select the station. Updating Station & Category Lists Retrieving Stations
If stations stored in the station list Press the FAV button to open a
Category Lists can no longer be received: favorite page or to switch to another
Most stations that broadcast an 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ favorite page. Briefly press one of
RDS program type code specify the SEL knob. the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
type of programming transmitted. station.
Some stations change the program 2. Select Update AM or FM Station
type code depending on the List, if the stations stored in the
content. The system stores the station list are no longer
RDS stations sorted by program received. A station search will be
type in the FM category list. completed and the first station in
the updated list will play.
Autostore Stations Satellite Radio Control Buttons

AS (Autostore): Autostore Vehicles with an XM Satellite Radio The buttons used to control the
searches and stores six FM and tuner and a valid XM Satellite Radio XM radio are:
six AM stations with the strongest subscription can receive XM BAND: Press to turn the radio on
signal. To use autostore: programming. and choose between AM, FM,
1. Press BAND to select FM or AM. XM Satellite Radio Service and XM.
2. Press AS for at least XM is a satellite radio service based g or l : Press to go to the
two seconds until a beep previous or next channel.
in the 48 contiguous United States
sounds. SEARCH displays on FAV: Press to open the
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
the radio, followed by the Satellite Radio has a wide variety of favorites list.
number of stations found.
programming and commercial-free 1 to 6: Press to select a favorite.
3. The radio will automatically store music, coast to coast, and in
the six strongest stations found digital-quality sound. A service fee MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn to
as autostore presets. is required to receive the XM select a channel.
Press the AS button to alternate service. If XM Service needs to be INFO: Press to display additional
between the autostore stations and reactivated, the radio will display information that may be available
favorites. "No Subscription Please Renew" on about the current song.
channel XM1. For more information,
AS displays on the radio when using contact XM at www.xmradio.com or k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
autostore presets. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., and time shifted content, if equipped.
Autostore does not delete www.xmradio.ca or
previously stored favorite stations. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Autostore does not function with
XM radio stations.
Selecting the XM Band Selecting an XM Channel To select a channel using the MENU
or MENU/SEL knob:
Press the BAND button to choose XM channels can be selected by
between the AM, FM, and XM using g, l, the MENU or MENU/ 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
bands. The last channel played in SEL knob, or the Menu system. knob and select Channel List.
that band begins to play when that 2. Select the desired channel.
band is selected. Selecting a Channel Using g
Selecting a Channel Using the
XM Categories or l
Menu System
XM channels are organized in . Press and release g or l to 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
categories. go to the previous or next SEL knob.
channel.
Removing or Adding Categories 2. Select XM Category List.
Channels in a category that have
. Press and hold g or l to 3. Select the category.
been removed can still be accessed scroll through the previous or
next channel until the channel is 4. Select the channel.
by using g or l, or the MENU or
reached. Storing an XM Channel as a
MENU/SEL knob.
To add or remove categories: Selecting a Channel Using the Favorite
MENU or MENU/SEL Knob Channels from all bands can be
1. Press the CONFIG button.
To select an XM channel using the stored in any order in the favorite
2. Select Radio Settings. MENU or MENU/SEL knob: pages.
3. Select XM Categories. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob Up to six channels can be stored in
4. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL to highlight an XM channel. The each favorite page and the number
knob to highlight the category. channel is selected after a short of available favorite pages can
delay. be set.
knob to remove or add the
category.
Storing a Channel as a Favorite Loading XM: The audio system is No Information: The system is
To store the channel to a position acquiring and processing audio and working properly. No text or
in the list, press and hold the text data. No action is needed. This informational messages are
corresponding 1 to 6 button until message should disappear shortly. available at this time on this
the channel can be heard again. Channel Off Air: This channel is channel.
not currently in service. Tune in to No Subscription Please Renew:
Retrieving Channels another channel. XM subscription needs to be
Press the FAV button to open a Channel Unauth: This channel is reactivated. Contact XM at
favorite page or to change to blocked or cannot be received with www.xmradio.com or
another favorite page. Briefly press your XM Subscription package. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., and
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve www.xmradio.ca or
the channel. Channel Unavailable: This 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
previously assigned channel is no
XM Messages longer assigned. Tune to another No XM Signal: The system is
station. working properly. The vehicle may
XL (Explicit Language be in a location where the XM signal
Channels): These channels, or No Artist Info: The system is is being blocked. When the vehicle
any others, can be blocked working properly. No artist is moved into an open area, the
by request, by calling information is available at this time signal should return.
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., and on this channel.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. CAT Not Found: The system is
No Title Info: The system is working properly. There are no
XM Updating: The encryption code working properly. No song title channels available for the selected
in the receiver is being updated. information is available at this time category.
No action is required. This process on this channel.
should take no longer than XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
30 seconds. No CAT Info: The system is this message alternates with the
working properly. No category XM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label.
information is available at this time This label is needed to activate
on this channel. the service.
Unknown: If this message is FM XM™ Satellite Radio Service

received when tuned to channel 0,
FM signals only reach about 16 to XM Satellite Radio Service gives
there could be a receiver fault.
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the digital radio reception from coast to
Consult with your dealer.
radio has a built-in electronic circuit coast in the 48 contiguous United
Check Antenna: If this message that automatically works to reduce States, and in Canada. Just as with
does not clear within a short period interference, some static can occur, FM, tall buildings or hills can
of time, the receiver could have a especially around tall buildings or interfere with satellite radio signals,
fault. Consult with your dealer. hills, causing the sound to fade in causing the sound to fade in and
XM Not Available: If this message and out. out. In addition, traveling or standing
does not clear within a short period under heavy foliage, bridges,
AM garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer. The range for most AM stations is of the XM signal for a period of time.
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
Cellular Phone Usage
Radio Reception
station frequencies to interfere with Cellular phone usage may cause
Frequency interference and static each other. For better radio interference with the vehicle's radio.
can occur during normal radio reception, most AM radio stations This interference may occur when
reception if items such as cell phone boost the power levels during the making or receiving phone calls,
chargers, vehicle convenience day, and then reduce these levels charging the phone's battery,
accessories, and external electronic during the night. Static can also or simply having the phone on. This
devices are plugged into the occur when things like storms and interference can cause an increased
accessory power outlet. If there is power lines interfere with radio level of static while listening to the
interference or static, unplug the reception. When this happens, try radio. If static is received while
item from the accessory power reducing the treble on the radio. listening to the radio, unplug the
outlet. cellular phone and turn it off.
Satellite Radio Antenna Audio Players mild neutral detergent solution

mixed with water, and clean it.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is Wipe the disc from the center to
located on the roof of the vehicle. CD Player the outer edge.
Keep the antenna clear of The CD player can play audio CDs
obstructions for clear radio Care of the CD Player
and MP3 CDs.
reception. Do not add a label to a disc, as it
The CD player will not play could get caught in the CD player.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the 8 cm (3 in) CDs.
performance of the XM system may If a label is needed, label the top of
be affected if the sunroof is open. Care of CDs the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Sound quality can be reduced due
Multi-Band Antenna to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
The multi-band antenna is on the quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage
used for the AM‐FM radio, OnStar, Handle discs carefully and store the CD player.
the XM Satellite Radio Service them in their original cases or other Notice: If a label is added to a
System, and GPS (Global protective cases away from direct CD, more than one CD is inserted
Positioning System), if the vehicle sunlight and dust. If the bottom into the slot at a time, or an
has these features. Keep the surface of a disc is damaged, the attempt is made to play scratched
antenna clear of obstructions for disc may not play properly or at all. or damaged CDs, the CD player
clear reception. Do not touch the bottom surface of could be damaged. While using
a disc while handling it; this could the CD player, use only CDs in
damage the surface. Pick up discs good condition without any label,
by grasping the outer edges or the load one CD at a time, and keep
edge of the hole and the outer edge. the CD player and the loading slot
If the bottom surface of a disc is free of foreign materials, liquids,
dirty, take a soft lint‐free cloth, and debris.
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
Control Buttons Inserting a CD Selecting a CD Track

The buttons used to control the With the printed side facing up, Using the control buttons:
CD player are: insert a disc into the CD slot until it
is drawn in.
. Press g or l to select the
CD/AUX: Press to use the previous or next track.
CD player. Removing a CD . Turn the TUNE knob.
l or g : Press to select tracks or
Press Y.
to fast forward or rewind within a Using the CD Menu:
track. The disc is pushed out of the 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
CD slot. SEL knob.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the current track If the disc is not removed after it is 2. Select Tracks list.
that may be available. ejected, it is pulled back in after a
3. Select the track.
few seconds.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn to Playing a CD or MP3 CD
enter the menu. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
Press the CD/AUX button if there is and then set Shuffle Songs to On.
SELECT: Press to select an item. a disc in the player; it begins
playing. Fast Forward and Rewind
Y: Press to eject the disc.
Information about the disc and Press and hold l or g to fast
current track is shown on the forward or rewind within the
display depending on the current track.
data stored.
Selecting an MP3 Track

. Song Titles
Using the control buttons:
. Genres
. Folder View
. Press g or l to select the
previous or next track. To search for tracks:
. Turn the TUNE knob. 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
SEL knob.
Using the CD Menu:
2. Select Search.
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
SEL knob. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
2. Select Playlists/Folders.
or Folder View.
3. Select the playlist or folder. A. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary
4. Select the track. Input Jack
Searching for MP3 Tracks Auxiliary Devices B. SD Card Slot

The optional AUX input allows C. USB Port
The search feature may take some
time to display the information after portable devices to connect to the 3.5 mm Jack
reading the disc due to the amount vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
of information stored on the disc. auxiliary jack or USB port. Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
FM automatically plays while the the auxiliary input jack to use a
THe SD Slot allows SD cards to be portable audio player.
disc is being read. inserted and used with the audio
Tracks can be searched by: system. Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
. Playlists Portable devices are controlled by only be controlled using the controls
using the menu system described in on the device.
. Artists Operation on page 7‑6.
. Albums
Adjusting the Volume Connecting and Controlling 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
an iPod™ Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Turn the O knob to adjust the Audio Books, or Composers.
volume of the infotainment system Not all iPods can be controlled by
after the volume level has been set the infotainment system. 4. Select the track.
on the portable audio device. Shuffle
Connecting an iPod
USB Port Connect the iPod to the USB port. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
For vehicles with a USB port, the and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to
Searching for a Track On or Off, then press the BACK
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment Tracks that are found can be button to return to the main screen.
system. searched for by: On: Plays tracks in the current
. iPods
. Playlists folder in random order.
. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs)
. Artists Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
. USB Drives
. Albums
Repeat
. Zunes®
. Song Titles
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,
. Podcasts
and set Repeat to On or Off, then
and Zunes are compatible with the . Genres press the BACK button to return to
infotainment system. Devices are the main screen.
also charged while plugged into the
. Audio Books
USB port. . Composers On: Repeats the current track.
To search for tracks: Off: Starts playback from the
beginning of the current track after
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ the last track finishes.
SEL knob.
2. Select Search.
Connecting and Controlling a 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD) Song Titles, Podcasts, USB Drive
or Zune or Genres.
The infotainment system can only
Connecting a PFD or Zune 4. Select the track. play back .mp3 and .wma files from
Shuffle Functionality a USB drive.
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob Only the first 10,000 songs are
and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to recognized on the device.
Searching for a Track
On or Off. When a device is not supported, the
Tracks can be searched for by: message “No supported data found.
On: Plays current tracks in random
. Playlists order. You can safely disconnect the
device” appears.
. Artists Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order. Connecting a USB Drive
. Albums
Repeat Functionality Connect the USB drive to the
. Song Titles
USB port.
. Podcasts Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
and set Repeat to On or Off. Searching for a Track
. Genres
Repeat On: Repeats the current It is normal for the search feature
To search for tracks: track. to take some time to display the
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ information after reading the device
Repeat Off: Starts playback from due to the amount of information
SEL knob. the beginning of the current track stored.
2. Select Search. after the last track finishes.
Files that do not have any meta Shuffle Functionality Phone

data stored in the ID3 tag display Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
as Unknown. and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to Bluetooth (Overview)
Tracks can be searched for by: On or Off.
For vehicles equipped with
. Playlists* On: Plays current tracks in random Bluetooth capability, the system can
. Artists order. interact with many cell phones,
Off: Plays current tracks in allowing:
. Albums
sequential order. . Placement and receipt of calls in
. Song Titles a hands-free mode.
Repeat Functionality
. Genres . Sharing of the cell phone’s
. Folder View and set Repeat to On or Off. address book or contact list with
*This only displays if a playlist is the vehicle.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
found on the device. track. To minimize driver distraction,
To search for tracks: before driving, and with the vehicle
Repeat Off: Starts playback from parked:
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ the beginning of the current track
SEL knob. after the last track finishes.
. Become familiar with the
features of the cell phone.
2. Select Search. Organize the phone book and
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, contact lists clearly and delete
Song Titles, Genres, duplicate or rarely used entries.
or Folder View. If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
. Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system $ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to
can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to operation.
this section for more information. make and receive phone calls. The
. If the cell phone has voice infotainment system and voice Infotainment System Controls
dialing capability, learn to use recognition are used to control the If equipped, the infotainment system
that feature to access the system. The system can be used allows certain controls to be
address book or contact list. See while in ON/RUN or ACC/ selected on the infotainment display.
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section ACCESSORY. The range of the See the OnStar Owner’s manual
for more information. Bluetooth system can be up to under "OnStar Screen User
9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support Interface" for more information.
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone all functions and not all phones work
Numbers” in this section for with the Bluetooth system. See For information about how to
more information. www.gm.com/bluetooth for more navigate the menu system using the
information about compatible infotainment controls, see Operation
{ WARNING phones. on page 7‑6.
Bluetooth Controls
5 \ > (PHONE/MUTE): Press to
When using a cell phone, it can enter the Phone main menu. Press
be distracting to look too long or Use the buttons located on the to mute the audio system.
too often at the screen of the infotainment system and the
phone or the infotainment steering wheel to operate the Voice Recognition
(navigation) system. Taking your Bluetooth system. The voice recognition system uses
eyes off the road too long or too commands to control the system
often could cause a crash Steering Wheel Controls
and dial phone numbers.
resulting in injury or death. b / g (Push To Talk) : Press to
Noise: The system may not
Focus your attention on driving. answer incoming calls, confirm
recognize voice commands if there
system information, and start voice
is too much background noise.
recognition.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to See Radio Frequency Statement on Pairing Information
indicate that the system is ready for page 13‑16 for information . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
a voice command. Wait for the tone regarding Part 15 of the Federal capability cannot be paired to
and then speak. Communications Commission (FCC) the vehicle as a phone and an
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a rules and Industry Canada MP3 player at the same time.
calm and natural voice. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
. Up to five cell phones can be
Audio System Bluetooth (Infotainment paired to the Bluetooth system.
When using the Bluetooth system, Controls) . The pairing process is disabled
sound comes through the vehicle's when the vehicle is moving.
For information about how to
front audio system speakers and navigate the menu system using the
. Pairing only needs to be
overrides the audio system. Use the infotainment controls, see Operation completed once, unless the
VOL/ O knob during a call to on page 7‑6. pairing information on the cell
change the volume level. The phone changes or the cell phone
adjusted volume level remains in Pairing is deleted from the system.
memory for later calls. The system A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone . Only one paired cell phone can
maintains a minimum volume level. must be paired to the Bluetooth be connected to the Bluetooth
Other Information system and then connected to the system at a time.
vehicle before it can be used. See .
The Bluetooth® word mark and If multiple paired cell phones are
your cell phone manufacturer's user
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® within range of the system, the
guide for Bluetooth functions before
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks system connects to the first
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
by General Motors is under license. available paired cell phone in the
phone is not connected, calls will be
Other trademarks and trade names order that they were first paired
made using OnStar Hands‐Free
are those of their respective owners. to the system. To link to a
Calling, if available. Refer to the
different paired phone, see
OnStar Owner's Guide for more
“Linking to a Different Phone”
information.
later in this section.
Pairing a Phone The system responds with Linking to a Different Phone

1. Press the CONFIG button. “<Phone name> has been To link to a different phone, the new
successfully paired” after the phone must be in the vehicle and
2. Select Phone Settings. pairing process is complete. available to be connected to the
3. Select Bluetooth. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pair Bluetooth system before the
4. Select Pair Device (Phone). additional phones. process is started.
A four‐digit Personal Listing All Paired and Connected 1. Press the CONFIG button.
Identification Number (PIN) Phones
appears on the display. 2. Select Phone Settings.
The PIN is used in Step 6. 1. Press the CONFIG button. 3. Select Bluetooth.
5. Start the pairing process on the 2. Select Phone Settings. 4. Select Device List.
cell phone to be paired to the 3. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select the new phone to
vehicle. See the cell phone link to and follow the on
manufacturer's user guide for 4. Select Device List.
screen prompts.
information on this process. Deleting a Paired Phone
If delete is selected, the
6. Locate the device named 1. Press the CONFIG button. highlighted phone will
“Your Vehicle” in the list on be deleted.
2. Select Phone Settings.
the cell phone. Follow the
instructions on the cell phone to 3. Select Bluetooth.
enter the PIN provided in Step 4. 4. Select Device List.
After the PIN is successfully
entered, the system prompts you 5. Select the phone to delete and
to provide a name for the paired follow the on screen prompts.
cell phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phones
are paired and connected to
the vehicle.
Making a Call Using To make a call using the Phone Making a Call
Phone Book Book menu:
To make a call:
For cell phones that support the 1. Press 5 \ > once or twice
phone book feature, the Bluetooth 1. Press 5 \ > once or twice
(depending on the radio).
system can use the contacts stored (depending on the radio).
2. Select Phone Book.
on your cell phone to make calls. 2. Enter the character sequence.
See your cell phone phone 3. Search through the list by See “Entering a Character
manufacturer's user guide or selecting the letter group the Sequence” in Operation on
contact your wireless provider to phone book entry begins with, page 7‑6 for more information.
find out if this feature is supported or press the MENU or MENU/
3. Select Call to start dialing the
by your phone. SEL button to scroll through the
number.
entire list of names/numbers in
When a cell phone supports the
the phone book. Accepting or Declining a Call
phone book feature, the Phone
Book and Call Lists menus are 4. Select the name or number you When an incoming call is received,
automatically available. want to call. the infotainment system mutes and
The Phone Book menu allows you To make a call using the Call a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
to access the phone book stored in Lists menu: Accepting a Call
the cell phone to make a call.
1. Press 5 \ > once or twice Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
The Call Lists menu allows you to (depending on the radio). to “Answer” and press the MENU or
access the phone numbers from the MENU/SEL knob to accept the call.
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and 2. Select Call Lists.
Missed Calls menus on your cell 3. Select the Incoming Calls, Declining a Call
phone to make a call. Outgoing Calls, or Missed Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
Calls list. to “Decline” and press the MENU or
4. Select the name or number you MENU/SEL knob to decline the call.
want to call.
Call Waiting Conference Calling Ending a Call

Call waiting must be supported on Conference calling and three‐way Turn or press the MENU or MENU/
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by calling must be supported on the SEL knob and select Hang Up.
the wireless service carrier to work. Bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work. Muting a Call
Accepting a Call
To start a conference while in a To Mute a Call
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob current call:
to “Answer” and press the MENU or Turn or press the MENU or MENU/
MENU/SEL knob to accept the call. 1. Turn or press the MENU or SEL knob and select Mute Call.
MENU/SEL knob. To Cancel Mute
Declining a Call
2. Select Enter Number. Turn or press the MENU or MENU/
to “Decline” and press the MENU or 3. Enter the character sequence SEL knob and select Mute Call.
MENU/SEL knob to decline the call. then select Call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
Switching Between Calls Operation on page 7‑6 for more (DTMF) Tones
(Call Waiting Calls Only) information. The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
To switch between calls: 4. After the call has been placed, send numbers during a call. This is
turn or press the MENU or used when calling a menu‐driven
1. Turn or press the MENU or
MENU/SEL knob and choose phone system.
MENU/SEL knob.
Merge Calls. 1. Turn or press the MENU or
2. Select Switch Call from
5. To add more callers to the MENU/SEL knob and select
the menu.
conference call, repeat Steps 1 Enter Number.
through 4. The number of callers 2. Enter the character sequence.
that can be added is limited by See “Entering a Character
your wireless service carrier. Sequence” in Operation on
Bluetooth Pairing Information Pairing a Phone

(Voice Recognition) . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press b / g. The system
capability cannot be paired to responds “Ready,” followed
Using Voice Recognition the vehicle as a phone and an by a tone.
To use voice recognition, press MP3 player at the same time.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
the b / g button located on the . Up to five cell phones can be can be skipped.
steering wheel. Use the commands paired to the Bluetooth system.
below for the various voice features. 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
. The pairing process is disabled with instructions and a four‐digit
For additional information, say when the vehicle is moving.
“Help” while you are in a voice Personal Identification Number
recognition menu.
. Pairing only needs to be (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
completed once, unless the 4. Start the pairing process on the
Pairing pairing information on the cell cell phone that you want to pair.
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone phone changes or the cell phone For help with this process, see
must be paired to the Bluetooth is deleted from the system. your cell phone manufacturer's
system and then connected to the . Only one paired cell phone can user guide.
vehicle before it can be used. See be connected to the Bluetooth 5. Locate the device named “Your
your cell phone manufacturer's user system at a time. Vehicle” in the list on the cell
guide for Bluetooth functions before . If multiple paired cell phones are phone. Follow the instructions
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth within range of the system, the on the cell phone to enter the
phone is not connected, calls will be system connects to the first PIN provided in Step 3. After the
made using OnStar Hands‐Free available paired cell phone in the PIN is successfully entered, the
Calling, if available. Refer to the order that they were first paired system prompts you to provide a
OnStar Owner's Guide for more to the system. To link to a name for the paired cell phone.
information. different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
This name will be used to Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.”

indicate which phones are If the phone name you want to 3. Say “Change phone.”
paired and connected to the delete is unknown, see “Listing All
vehicle. The system responds . If another cell phone is
Paired and Connected Phones.” found, the response will be
with “<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the 1. Press b / g. The system “<Phone name> is now
pairing process is complete. responds “Ready,” followed connected.”
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair by a tone. . If another cell phone is not
additional phones. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone
remains connected.
Listing All Paired and Connected 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
Phones for which phone to delete. Storing and Deleting Phone
The system can list all cell phones 4. Say the name of the phone you Numbers
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is want to delete. The system can store up to
also connected to the vehicle, the 30 phone numbers as name tags
system responds with “is connected” Connecting to a Different Phone
in the Hands‐Free Directory that is
after that phone name. To connect to a different cell phone, shared between the Bluetooth and
the Bluetooth system looks for the OnStar systems.
1. Press b / g. The system next available cell phone in the
responds “Ready,” followed by The following commands are used
order in which all available cell
a tone. to delete and store phone numbers.
phones were paired. Depending on
2. Say “Bluetooth.” which cell phone you want to Store: This command will store a
connect to, you may have to use phone number, or a group of
3. Say “List.” this command several times. numbers as a name tag.
1. Press b / g. The system Digit Store: This command allows
responds “Ready,” followed a phone number to be stored as a
by a tone. name tag by entering the digits
one at a time.
Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say Command
Delete All Name Tags: This “Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored
command deletes all stored name 1. Press b / g. The system name tags in the Hands Free
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling responds “Ready,” followed Calling Directory and the
Directory and the Destinations by a tone. Destinations Directory.
Directory. To delete all name tags:
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Using the “Store” Command
3. Say each digit, one at a time, 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system that you want to store. After responds “Ready,” followed by
responds “Ready,” followed each digit is entered, the system a tone.
by a tone. repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
followed by a tone. After the last
2. Say “Store.” digit has been entered, say Listing Stored Numbers
3. Say the phone number or group “Store,” and then follow the
The list command will list all stored
of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
numbers and name tags.
at once with no pauses, then save a name tag for this number.
follow the directions given by the Using the “List” Command
system to save a name tag for Using the “Delete” Command
this number. 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed
Using the “Digit Store” Command responds “Ready,” followed
by a tone.
by a tone.
If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Directory.”
recognized by the system, 2. Say “Delete.”
say “Clear” at any time to clear 3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”
3. Say the name tag you want
the last number. to delete. 4. Say “List.”
Making a Call Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called
The digit dial command allows a will be heard through the audio
Calls can be made using the
phone number to be dialed by speakers.
following commands.
entering the digits one at a time. Using the “Re‐dial” Command
Dial or Call: The dial or call
After each digit is entered, the
command can be used 1. Press b / g. The system
system repeats back the digit it
interchangeably to dial a phone responds “Ready,” followed
heard followed by a tone.
number or a stored name tag. by a tone.
If an unwanted number is
Digit Dial: This command allows a 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
recognized by the system, say
phone number to be dialed by The system dials the last
“Clear” at any time to clear the
entering the digits one at a time. number called from the
last number.
Re‐dial: This command is used connected cell phone.
To hear all of the numbers
to dial the last number used on the Once connected, the person called
recognized by the system, say
cell phone. will be heard through the audio
“Verify” at any time.
Using the “Dial” or “Call” speakers.
Command 1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed Receiving a Call
1. Press b / g. The system by a tone. When an incoming call is received,
responds “Ready,” followed by 2. Say “Digit Dial.” the audio system mutes and a ring
a tone. tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” that you want to dial. After each . Press b / g to answer the call.
3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
pausing or say the name tag. repeats back the digit it heard
. Press $ / i to ignore a call.
followed by a tone. After the
Once connected, the person called
last digit has been entered,
will be heard through the audio
say “Dial.”
speakers.
Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to The cell phone must be paired and
dial the number of the third party connected with the Bluetooth
Call waiting must be supported on
to be called. system before a call can be
the cell phone and enabled by the
4. Once the call is connected, transferred. The connection process
wireless service carrier.
can take up to two minutes after the
press b / g to link all
. Press b / g to answer an ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
callers together.
incoming call when another call To Transfer Audio from the
is active. The original call is Ending a Call Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
placed on hold.
Press $ / i to end a call. During a call with the audio in the
. Press b / g again to return to vehicle:
the original call. Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside
1. Press b / g.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
person on the other end of the call
. Press $ / i to disconnect the To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
cannot hear them.
System from a Cell Phone
current call and switch to the
call on hold. To mute a call, press b / g, and During a call with the audio on the
then say “Mute Call.” cell phone, press b / g. The audio
Three‐Way Calling
To cancel mute, press b / g, and transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
Three‐way calling must be then say “Un‐mute Call.” does not transfer to the vehicle, use
supported on the cell phone and the audio transfer feature on the
enabled by the wireless service Transferring a Call cell phone. See your cell phone
carrier. manufacturer's user guide for
Audio can be transferred between
more information.
1. While on a call, press b / g. the Bluetooth system and the
cell phone.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

Voice pass‐thru allows access to the (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing
To access contacts stored in the menu‐driven phone system. information. For information on how
cell phone: Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the
stored for use. previous sections on “Deleting a
1. Press b / g. The system Paired Phone” and “Deleting
Sending a Number or Name Tag Name Tags.”
responds “Ready,” followed by
During a Call
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 1. Press b / g. The system
can be skipped. responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
3. Say “Voice.” The system
responds “OK, accessing 2. Say “Dial.”
<phone name>.” 3. Say the number or name tag
The cell phone's normal prompt to send.
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Trademarks and
License Agreements
Manufactured under license from Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee,

Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the taxes, one time activation fee, and
double-D symbol are trademarks of other fees may apply. Subscription
Dolby Laboratories. fee is consumer only. All fees and
Manufactured under license under programming subject to change.
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; Subscriptions subject to Customer
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; Agreement available at
6,487,535 & other U.S. and www.xmradio.com. XM™ service
worldwide patents issued & only available in the 48 contiguous
pending. DTS and the Symbol are United States and Canada*.
registered trademarks and DTS *Canada — Some deterioration of
Digital Surround and the DTS logos service may occur in extreme
are trademarks of DTS Inc. “Made for iPod and iPhone” means
northern latitudes. This is beyond
All Rights Reserved. that an electronic accessory has
the control of XM™ Satellite Radio.
been designed to connect
Explicit Language Notice —
specifically to iPod and has been
Channels with frequent explicit
certified by the developer to meet
language are indicated with an
Apple performance standards.
“XL” preceding the channel name.
iPod is a trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Channel blocking is available for General Requirements: related content delivery.

XM Satellite Radio receivers by 1. A License Agreement from XM™ For more information, visit
notifying XM at: is required for any product that www.gracenote.com.
. USA Customers — Visit incorporates XM Technology CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and music
www.xmradio.com or call and/or for use of any of the and video-related data from
1-800-929-2100. XM marks to be manufactured, Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to
. Canadian Customers — Visit distributed or marketed in the present Gracenote. One or more
www.xmradio.ca or call XM Service Area. patents owned by Gracenote apply
1-877-438-9677. 2. For products to be distributed, to this product and service. See
marketed and/or sold in Canada, the Gracenote website for a
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, non-exhaustive list of applicable
disassemble, reverse engineer, a separate agreement is
required with Canadian Satellite Gracenote patents. Gracenote and
hack, manipulate, or otherwise CDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, the
make available any technology or Radio Inc. (operating as
XM Canada). Gracenote logo and logotype, and
software incorporated in receivers the “Powered by Gracenote” logo
compatible with the XM™ Satellite are either registered trademarks or
Radio System or that support the trademarks of Gracenote in the
XM website, the Online Service or United States and/or other
any of its content. Furthermore, the countries.
AMBER voice compression software
included in this product is protected If you require more information
by intellectual property rights regarding the use of the
including patent rights, copyrights, Gracenote Service, visit:
Music and video recognition www.gracenote.com/corporate.
and trade secrets of Digital Voice technology and related data are
Systems, Inc. provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote For the data provided by
is the industry standard in music Gracenote® Music Recognition
recognition technology and Service, the content is not
necessarily guaranteed 100%.
Regarding the use of Gracenote You agree not to assign, copy, Under no circumstances will
Music Recognition Service, when transfer or transmit the Gracenote Gracenote become liable for any
this product is used, it is necessary Software or any Gracenote Data to payment to you for any information
to agree to the following articles. any third party. that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
Gracenote® End User License YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
rights under this Agreement against
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
This application or device contains GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR you directly in its own name.
software from Gracenote, Inc. of GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT The Gracenote service uses a
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED unique identifier to track queries for
The software from Gracenote (the HEREIN. You agree that your statistical purposes.
“Gracenote Software”) enables this non-exclusive license to use the
application to perform disc and/or The purpose of a randomly
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote assigned numeric identifier is to
file identification and obtain Software, and Gracenote Servers
music-related information, including allow the Gracenote service to
will terminate if you violate these count queries without knowing
name, artist, track, and title restrictions. If your license
information (“Gracenote Data”) anything about who you are. For
terminates, you agree to cease any more information, see the web page
from online servers or embedded and all use of the Gracenote Data,
databases (collectively, “Gracenote for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote service.
Servers”) and to perform other Gracenote Servers.
functions. You may use Gracenote The Gracenote Software and each
Data only by means of the intended Gracenote reserves all rights item of Gracenote Data are licensed
End-User functions of this in Gracenote Data, the to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no
application or device. You agree Gracenote Software, and the representations or warranties,
that you will use Gracenote Data, Gracenote Servers, including all express or implied, regarding the
the Gracenote Software, and ownership rights. accuracy of any Gracenote Data
Gracenote Servers for your own from in the Gracenote Servers.
personal non-commercial use only.
Gracenote reserves the right to Gracenote disclaims all warranties

delete data from the Gracenote express or implied, including, but
Servers or to change data not limited to, implied warranties of
categories for any cause that merchantability, fitness for a
Gracenote deems sufficient. particular purpose, title, and
No warranty is made that the non-infringement. Gracenote does
Gracenote Software or Gracenote not warrant the results that will be
Servers are error-free or that obtained by your use of the
functioning of Gracenote Software Gracenote software or any
or Gracenote Servers will be Gracenote server. In no case will
uninterrupted. Gracenote be liable for any
consequential or incidental
Gracenote is not obligated to damages or for any lost profits or
provide you with new enhanced or lost revenues.
additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control F. Driver and Passenger Heated

Seats (If Equipped)
Systems G. Rear Window Defogger
Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, defrosting, and H. Defog
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 ventilation for the vehicle can be
Automatic Climate Control controlled with these systems. I. Defrost
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Vehicles with Air Conditioning
Vehicles without Air Conditioning
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
A. Temperature Control A. Temperature Control

B. Bi-level Air Mode B. Bi-level Air Mode
C. Floor Air Mode C. Floor Air Mode
D. Vent Air Mode D. Vent Air Mode
E. Fan Control E. Fan Control
8-2 Climate Controls
F. Driver and Passenger Heated 7 (Floor): Air is directed to the h (Recirculation, If Equipped):
Seats (If Equipped) floor outlets. Press to turn on the recirculation.
G. Rear Window Defogger W (Defog): Clears the windows of An indicator light comes on. Air is
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the recirculated inside the vehicle.
H. Recirculation It helps to quickly cool the air inside
windshield and floor outlets.
I. Defog the vehicle or prevent outside air
0 (Defrost): Clears the and odors from entering.
J. Air Conditioning windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the To improve fuel efficiency and to
K. Defrost
windshield and side window outlets. cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase may be automatically selected in
or decrease the fan speed. For best results, clear all snow and warm weather. The recirculation
ice from the windshield before
Temperature Control: Turn to defrosting. light will not come on. Press h to
increase or decrease the select recirculation; press it again to
temperature. Do not drive the vehicle until all select outside air.
windows are clear.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Rear Window Defogger
To change the current mode, press Air Conditioning
one of the following: 1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
# (Air Conditioning, If the rear window defogger on or off.
F (Vent): Air is directed to the Equipped): Press to turn the The rear window defogger turns off
instrument panel outlets. air conditioning on or off. If the after about 10 minutes. It can also
fan is turned off or the outside be turned off by turning the ignition
* (Bi-level): Air is directed to the
temperature falls below freezing, to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
instrument panel outlets and the
the air conditioning compressor OFF. If turned on again it runs for
floor outlets.
will not work. about five minutes before
turning off.
Do not drive the vehicle until all
windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade Automatic Climate E. Fan Control

or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
Control System F. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats
anything to the defogger grid The heating, cooling, and ventilation
lines in the rear glass. These for the vehicle can be controlled G. Power
actions may damage the rear with this system. H. Recirculation
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. I. MODE (Air Delivery Mode)
Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press J. AQS (Air Quality Sensor)
to turn the heated seats on or off. K. Air Conditioning
page 3‑7 Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on, the
A. Temperature Control system is in full automatic operation.
If the air delivery mode or fan
B. Rear Window Defogger setting is manually adjusted, the
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation) auto indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings.
D. Defrost
To place the system in automatic Manual Operation C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided

mode do the following: O (Power): Press to turn the between the windshield, instrument
1. Press AUTO. climate control system on or off. panel, and floor outlets.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the Fan Control: Turn the knob [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
system time to stabilize. Then clockwise or counterclockwise to floor outlets.
adjust the temperature as increase or decrease the fan speed. - (Defog): Clears the windows of
needed for best comfort. The selected fan speed is indicated fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
To improve fuel efficiency and to by a number on the display screen. windshield and floor outlets.
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation. 0 (Defrost): Clears the
may be automatically selected in windshield of fog or frost more
warm weather. The recirculation MODE (Air Delivery Mode): Press quickly. Air is directed to the
light will not come on. Press h to to change the direction of the windshield.
select recirculation; press it again to airflow. The current mode appears
in the display screen. Automatic # (Air Conditioning): Press to
select outside air. turn the automatic air conditioning
operation is canceled and manual
English units can be changed to mode is initiated. Press AUTO to on or off. If the fan is turned off or
metric units through the Driver return to automatic operation. the outside temperature falls below
Information Center (DIC). See freezing, the air conditioning
Vehicle Personalization on To change the current mode, select compressor will not run.
page 5‑34. one of the following:
Press AUTO to return to automatic
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the operation and the air conditioner
instrument panel outlets. runs as needed. When the indicator
\ (Bi-level): Air is divided light is on, the air conditioner runs
between the instrument panel automatically to cool the air inside
outlets and the floor outlets. the vehicle or to dry the air needed
to defog the windshield faster.
h (Recirculation): Press to turn for an extended period to prevent Rear Window Defogger
on recirculation. An indicator light the air inside the vehicle from
becoming too dry or stuffy. To adjust
= (Rear Window Defogger):
comes on. Air is recirculated to Press to turn the rear window
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle the sensitivity of the Air Quality
defogger on or off.
or prevent outside air and odors Control, see “Climate and Air
from entering. Quality” under Vehicle The rear window defogger turns
Personalization on page 5‑34. off automatically after about
Automatic Air Recirculation: 10 minutes. If turned on again it
When the AUTO indicator light is Auto Defog: The climate control
runs for about five minutes before
on, the air is automatically system may have a sensor to
turning off.
recirculated as needed to help automatically detect high humidity
quickly cool the inside of the inside the vehicle. When high The rear window defogger can be
vehicle. humidity is detected, the climate set to automatic operation. See
control system may adjust to “Climate and Air Quality” under
AQS (Air Quality Sensor): For outside air supply and turn on the Vehicle Personalization on
vehicles with an air quality sensor, air conditioner. If the climate control page 5‑34. When Auto Rear Defog
the climate control system adjusts to system does not detect possible is selected, the rear window
limit some exhaust fumes from window fogging, it returns to normal defogger turns on automatically
being pulled inside your vehicle. operation. To turn Auto Defog off or when the interior temperature is cold
Press the AQS button on the on, see “Climate and Air Quality” and the outside temperature is
climate control to activate the air under Vehicle Personalization on about 40°F and below. The auto
quality sensor. The air quality page 5‑34. rear defogger turns off automatically
sensor will not maintain recirculation after about 10 minutes. At higher
speeds, the rear window defogger
may stay on continuously.
For vehicles with heated outside The system will default to a heating Air Vents
rearview mirrors, they turn on when or cooling mode depending on the
the rear window defogger button is outside temperature and then go Adjustable air vents are in the
on and help to clear fog or frost from back to the previous settings. See center and on the side of the
the surface of the mirrors. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑9. instrument panel.
Heated Mirrors on page 2‑16. The rear window defogger turns on
Notice: Do not try to clear frost if it is cold outside.
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear Sensors
window with a razor blade or The solar sensor, located on top of
anything else that is sharp. This the instrument panel near the
may damage the rear window windshield, monitors the solar heat.
defogger grid and affect your
The climate control system uses the
radio's ability to pick up stations
sensor information to adjust the
clearly. The repairs would not be
temperature, fan speed,
covered by your warranty.
recirculation, and air delivery mode
Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press for best comfort.
to turn the heated seats on or off.
If the sensor is covered, the Move the slats (A) to change the
automatic climate control system direction of the airflow.
page 3‑7.
may not work properly.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote vehicle start feature, the
climate control system may run
when the vehicle is started remotely.
Operation Tips
. Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
Use the thumbwheels (B) near the . Keep the path under the front
air vents to open or close off the seats clear of objects to help
airflow. circulate the air inside of the
Additional air vents are located vehicle more effectively.
beneath the windshield, driver and . Use of non‐GM approved hood
passenger side door windows, and deflectors can adversely affect
in the footwells. These are fixed and the performance of the system.
cannot be adjusted. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-20
9-22
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
Operating Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Cruise Control
Driving Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Object Detection Systems
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking over Things
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-42
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Fuel
Engine Exhaust Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Running the Vehicle While
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Automatic Transmission California Fuel
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-29 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-45
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Manual Transmission Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-33 Filling a Portable Fuel
Starting and Operating Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15 Brakes
Ignition Positions Antilock Brake
(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Ignition Positions Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
9-2 Driving and Operating
Towing
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 distractions.
Driving Characteristics and Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Trailer Towing (Except Fuel judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Economy Model) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 activities divert your attention Program all trip information into
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 away from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
governments have enacted laws driving.
Conversions and Add-Ons
regarding driver distraction. Become
Add-On Electrical . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
Defensive Driving Drunk Driving

{ WARNING
Defensive driving means “always Death and injury associated with
Taking your eyes off the road too expect the unexpected.” The first drinking and driving is a global
long or too often could cause a step in driving defensively is to wear tragedy.
crash resulting in injury or death. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
Focus your attention on driving. page 3‑10. { WARNING
. Assume that other road users
Refer to the Infotainment section (pedestrians, bicyclists, and Drinking and then driving is
for more information on using that other drivers) are going to be very dangerous. Your reflexes,
system, including pairing and using careless and make mistakes. perceptions, attentiveness, and
a cell phone. Anticipate what they might do judgment can be affected by even
and be ready. a small amount of alcohol. You
If equipped, refer to the navigation can have a serious — or even
manual for information on that . Allow enough following distance
fatal — collision if you drive after
system, including pairing and using between you and the driver in
front of you. drinking.
a cell phone.
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle If the engine ever stops while the steering assist should return shortly
vehicle is being driven, brake after a few normal steering
Braking, steering, and accelerating normally but do not pump the movements.
are important factors in helping to brakes. Doing so could make the
control a vehicle while driving. See specific vehicle steering
pedal harder to push down. If the messages under Vehicle Messages
engine stops, there will be some (Canada Base Level) on page 5‑28
Braking power brake assist but it will be or Vehicle Messages (Canada
Braking action involves perception used when the brake is applied. Uplevel and United States) on
time and reaction time. Deciding to Once the power assist is used up, it page 5‑28.
push the brake pedal is perception can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push. See your dealer if there is a
time. Actually doing it is
problem.
reaction time.
Steering CurveTips
Average driver reaction time is
about three‐fourths of a second. Electric Power Steering . Take curves at a reasonable
In that time, a vehicle moving at speed.
Your vehicle has electric power
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
steering. It does not have power . Reduce speed before entering a
(66 ft), which could be a lot of
steering fluid. Regular maintenance curve, while the front wheels are
distance in an emergency.
is not required. straight.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
If power steering assist is lost due . Adjust speed so you can drive
include:
to a system malfunction, the vehicle through the curve. Maintain a
. Keep enough distance between can be steered, but may require reasonable, steady speed.
you and the vehicle in front increased effort.
of you.
. Wait until out of the curve before
If the steering wheel is turned in accelerating gently into the
. Avoid needless heavy braking. either direction several times until it straightaway.
. Keep pace with traffic. stops, or it is held until it is stopped
for an extended time, power
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery 2. Turn the steering wheel about

one-eighth of a turn, until the
There are times when steering can
right front tire contacts the
be more effective than braking. For
pavement edge.
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in the lane, or a 3. Then turn the steering wheel to
child darts out from between parked go straight down the roadway.
cars and stops right in front of you.
These problems can be avoided by Loss of Control
braking — if you can stop in time.
Skidding
If you cannot fully stop, follow these
suggestions: There are three types of skids that
correspond to the vehicle's three
. Quickly apply the brakes to control systems:
remove as much speed as
possible from a collision. . Braking Skid — wheels are
The vehicle's right wheels can drop not rolling.
. Steer around the problem, to off the edge of a road onto the
the left to right depending on shoulder while driving. Follow
. Steering or Cornering
available space. these tips: Skid — too much speed or
.
steering in a curve causes tires
Straighten the wheel once you 1. Ease off the accelerator and to slip and lose cornering force.
have avoided the object. then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer the vehicle so that it
. Acceleration Skid — too much
straddles the edge of the throttle causes the driving
pavement. wheels to spin.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids

. Try to avoid sudden steering,
by taking reasonable care suited acceleration, or braking, WARNING (Continued)
to existing conditions, and by not including reducing vehicle speed
overdriving those conditions. by shifting to a lower gear. Any After driving through a large
But skids are always possible. sudden changes could cause puddle of water or a car/vehicle
the tires to slide. wash, lightly apply the brake
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow pedal until the brakes work
these suggestions: Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid. normally.
. Ease your foot off the Flowing or rushing water creates
accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the
Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to go. The vehicle may Rain and wet roads can reduce
straighten out. Be ready for a vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this
second skid if it occurs. ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle
Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not
. Slow down and adjust your ignore police warnings and be
driving according to weather of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and very cautious about trying to drive
conditions. Stopping distance through flowing water.
can be longer and vehicle deep‐standing or flowing water.
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water, { WARNING Hydroplaning
snow, ice, gravel, or other Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
material on the road. Learn to Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a can build up under the vehicle's
recognize warning clues — such tires so they actually ride on the
as enough water, ice, or packed quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is
snow on the road to make a wet enough and you are going fast
mirrored surface — and slow lose control of the vehicle.
enough. When the vehicle is
down when you have any doubt. (Continued) hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet. Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
Other Rainy Weather Tips If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
Besides slowing down, other wet safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include:
weather driving tips include: and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Allow extra following distance. Other driving tips include: good shape.
. Pass with caution.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the interior tires, cooling system, and
. Keep windshield wiping transmission.
equipment in good shape. temperature cool.
. Shift to a lower gear when going
. Keep your eyes moving — scan
. Keep the windshield washer fluid down steep or long hills.
reservoir filled. the road ahead and to the sides.
. Have good tires with proper
. Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑42. If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
. Turn off cruise control.
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will have The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑35 improves vehicle
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving stability during hard stops on
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
even none going down a hill. You or ice between the tires and the Allow greater following distance on
could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip. any slippery road and watch for
engine running and the vehicle in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C slippery spots. Icy patches can
gear when going downhill. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to occur on otherwise clear roads in
fall, resulting in even less traction. shaded areas. The surface of a
Avoid driving on wet ice or in curve or an overpass can remain icy
. Stay in your own lane. Do not when the surrounding roads are
freezing rain until roads can be
swing wide or cut across the clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand.
center of the road. Drive at maneuvers and braking while
speeds that let you stay in your Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control on slippery
. Be alert on top of hills, surfaces.
quickly causes the wheels to spin
something could be in your lane
and makes the surface under the
(stalled car, accident).
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑27.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program on page 13‑6.
especially any that is blocking
To get help and keep everyone in
the exhaust pipe. Run the engine for short periods
the vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to only as needed to keep warm, but
. Turn on the hazard warning be careful.
time to be sure snow does
flashers.
not collect there. To save fuel, run the engine for only
. Tie a red cloth to an outside short periods as needed to warm
. Open a window about
mirror. the vehicle and then shut the engine
5 cm (2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the off and close the window most of
{ WARNING wind to bring in fresh air. the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on feel really uncomfortable from the
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument cold. Moving about to keep warm
cause exhaust gases to get panel. also helps.
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control If it takes some time for help to
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that arrive, now and then when you run
cannot be seen or smelled. circulates the air inside the the engine, push the accelerator
It can cause unconsciousness vehicle and set the fan speed pedal slightly so the engine runs
and even death. to the highest setting. See faster than the idle speed. This
(Continued) “Climate Control System” in keeps the battery charged to restart
the Index. the vehicle and to signal for help
(Continued) with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits
it Out
Slowly and cautiously spin the It is very important to know how
wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
If stuck too severely for the traction vehicle capacity weight and
system. Shift back and forth
system to free the vehicle, turn the
between R (Reverse) and a forward includes the weight of all
traction system off and use the occupants, cargo, and all
gear, or with a manual transmission,
rocking method. nonfactory‐installed options.
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as Two labels on the vehicle show
{ WARNING little as possible. To prevent how much weight it may
transmission wear, wait until the properly carry, the Tire and
If the vehicle's tires spin at high wheels stop spinning before shifting Loading Information label and
speed, they can explode, and you gears. Release the accelerator
or others could be injured. The
the Certification label.
pedal while shifting, and press
vehicle can overheat, causing an lightly on the accelerator pedal
engine compartment fire or other when the transmission is in gear.
damage. Spin the wheels as little Slowly spinning the wheels in the
as possible and avoid going forward and reverse directions
above 55 km/h (35 mph). causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
For information about using tire
might need to be towed out. If the
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
vehicle does need to be towed out,
Chains on page 10‑62.
see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑83.
Tire and Loading Information positions (A), and the maximum

{ WARNING Label vehicle capacity weight (B) in
Do not load the vehicle any kilograms and pounds.
heavier than the Gross The Tire and Loading
Vehicle Weight Rating Information label also shows
(GVWR), or either the the tire size of the original
maximum front or rear Gross equipment tires (C) and the
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). recommended cold tire inflation
This can cause systems to pressures (D). For more
break and change the way the information on tires and inflation
vehicle handles. This could see Tires on page 10‑42 and
cause loss of control and a Tire Pressure on page 10‑49.
crash. Overloading can also There is also important loading
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example information on the Certification
A vehicle-specific Tire and label. It tells you the Gross
Loading Information label is Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
attached to the vehicle center and the Gross Axle Weight
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver Rating (GAWR) for the front and
door open, you will find the label rear axle; see “Certification
attached below the door lock Label” later in this section.
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
Steps for Determining Correct and luggage load capacity

Load Limit is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
1. Locate the statement (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
“The combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's That weight may not safely
placard. exceed the available cargo
2. Determine the combined and luggage load capacity
weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
passengers that will be 6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1
riding in your vehicle. a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
3. Subtract the combined Example 1 =
weight of the driver and your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs. reduces the available cargo B. Subtract Occupant Weight
and luggage load capacity of @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle. 136 kg (300 lbs).
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. See Trailer Towing (Fuel C. Available Occupant and
For example, if the “XXX” Economy Model) on page 9‑53 Cargo Weight =
amount equals 1400 lbs and or Trailer Towing (Except Fuel 317 kg (700 lbs).
there will be five 150 lb Economy Model) on page 9‑53
passengers in your vehicle, for important information on
the amount of available cargo towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
vehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = Example 3 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs). Label Example
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = A vehicle-specific Certification
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). label, found on the vehicle
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and center pillar (B-pillar), tells you
Loading Information label for the gross weight capacity of the
specific information about the vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight

of the vehicle, all occupants, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed This could cause loss of far forward as possible.
the GVWR for the vehicle, or the control and a crash. Try to spread the weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating Overloading can also shorten evenly.
(GAWR) for either the front or the life of the vehicle.
rear axle.
. Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
And, if you do have a heavy If you put things inside the inside the vehicle so that
load, you should spread it out. vehicle — like suitcases, tools, some of them are above
See “Steps for Determining packages, or anything else — the tops of the seats.
Correct Load Limit” earlier in they will go as fast as the
this section.
. Do not leave an
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
unsecured child restraint
or turn quickly, or if there is a
{ WARNING crash, they will keep going.
in the vehicle.
. Secure loose items in
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross { WARNING the vehicle.
Vehicle Weight Rating . Do not leave a seat folded
Things inside the vehicle can
(GVWR), or either the down unless needed.
strike and injure people in a
maximum front or rear Gross sudden stop or turn, or in
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). a crash.
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
. Put things in the cargo
vehicle handles. area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
(Continued)
(Continued)
Starting and Following break‐in, engine speed

and load can be gradually
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
Operating increased. hand, see your dealer.
The key must be fully extended to
New Vehicle Break-In Ignition Positions start the vehicle.
Notice: The vehicle does not (Key Access) To shift out of P (Park), turn the
need an elaborate break-in. But it ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
will perform better in the long run brake pedal.
if you follow these guidelines:
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
. Do not drive at any one LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
constant speed, fast or slow, stopped, turn the ignition switch to
for the first 805 km (500 mi). LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Do not make full-throttle Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
starts. Avoid downshifting to will remain active. See Retained
brake or slow the vehicle. Accessory Power (RAP) on
. Avoid making hard stops for page 9‑23.
the first 322 km (200 mi) or This is the only position from which
so. During this time the new the key can be removed. This locks
brake linings are not yet the steering wheel, ignition, and
broken in. Hard stops with The ignition switch has four different
automatic transmission.
new linings can mean positions.
premature wear and earlier Notice: Using a tool to force the Do not turn the engine off when the
replacement. Follow this key to turn in the ignition could vehicle is moving. This will cause a
breaking-in guideline every cause damage to the switch or loss of power assist in the brake
time you get new brake break the key. Use the correct and steering systems and disable
linings. key, make sure it is all the way in, the airbags.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an B (ACC/ACCESSORY):

emergency: { WARNING This position provides power to
1. Brake using a firm and steady some of the electrical accessories.
Turning off the vehicle while It unlocks the steering wheel and
pressure. Do not pump the moving may cause loss of power
brakes repeatedly. This may ignition. To move the key from
assist in the brake and steering ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,
deplete power assist, requiring systems and disable the airbags.
increased brake pedal force. push in the key and then turn it
While driving, only shut the to LOCK/OFF.
2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral. This vehicle off in an emergency.
can be done while the vehicle is C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
moving. After shifting to Neutral, stays in this position when the
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, engine is running. This position can
continue to firmly apply the
and must be shut off while driving, be used to operate the electrical
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
turn the ignition to ACC/ accessories, including the
safe location.
ACCESSORY. ventilation fan and 12‐volt power
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift outlet, as well as to display some
The ignition switch can bind in the
to P (Park) with an automatic warning and indicator lights. This
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
transmission, or Neutral with a position can also be used for
turned off center. If this happens,
manual transmission. Turn the service and diagnostics, and to
move the steering wheel from right
ignition to LOCK/OFF. verify the proper operation of the
to left while turning the key to ACC/
4. Set the parking brake. See ACCESSORY. If this does not work, malfunction indicator lamp as may
Parking Brake on page 9‑36. then the vehicle needs service. be required for emission inspection
purposes. The transmission is
also unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
The battery could be drained if the Key Lock Release The key lock release is always
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY functional except in the case of an
or ON/RUN position with the engine uncharged or low voltage (less than
off. The vehicle might not start if the 9‐volt) battery. If the vehicle has an
battery is allowed to drain for an uncharged battery or a battery with
extended period of time. low voltage, try charging or jump
D (START): This position starts the starting the battery. See Jump
engine. When the engine starts, Starting on page 10‑80.
release the key. The ignition switch If charging or jump starting the
will return to ON/RUN for normal battery does not work, locate the
driving. hole below the ignition lock. Insert a
A warning tone sounds when the flat bladed tool or another key from
driver door is opened if the ignition the key chain into the opening.
is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the When the lever can be felt, actuate
key is in the ignition. Vehicles with an automatic the lever toward the driver, and
transmission are equipped with an remove the key from the ignition.
electronic key lock release system.
The key lock release is designed to
prevent ignition key removal unless
the shift lever is in P (Park).
Ignition Positions The transmitter must be in the If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
vehicle for the system to operate. the ignition will return to ACC/
(Keyless Access) If the pushbutton start is not ACCESSORY and the Driver
working, the vehicle may be near a Information Center (DIC) will display
strong radio antenna signal causing the message SHIFT TO PARK in
interference to the keyless access the Driver Information Center (DIC).
system. See Remote Keyless Entry See Transmission Messages on
(RKE) System Operation on page 5‑33 for more information.
page 2‑3 for more information. When the vehicle is shifted into
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle P (Park), the ignition system will
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or switch to OFF.
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must Do not turn the engine off when the
be applied. vehicle is moving. This will cause a
Stopping the Engine/OFF loss of power assist in the brake
(No LED Lights): When the and steering systems and disable
vehicle is stopped, press the engine the airbags.
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with pushbutton START/STOP button once to turn If the vehicle must be shut off in an
start. the engine off. emergency:
Pressing the button cycles it through If the vehicle is in P (Park), the 1. Brake using a firm and steady
three modes, ACC/ACCESSORY, ignition will turn off, and Retained pressure. Do not pump the
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the Accessory Power (RAP) will remain brakes repeatedly. This may
Engine/OFF. active. See Retained Accessory deplete power assist, requiring
Power (RAP) on page 9‑23 for increased brake pedal force.
more information.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). 4. Set the parking brake. See ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LED
This can be done while the Parking Brake on page 9‑36. Light): This mode allows you to
vehicle is moving. After shifting use some electrical accessories
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
{ WARNING when the engine is off.
With the ignition off, pressing the
safe location. Turning off the vehicle while button one time without the brake
3. Come to a complete stop, shift moving may cause loss of power pedal applied will place the ignition
to P (Park), and turn the ignition assist in the brake and steering system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with systems and disable the airbags.
The ignition will switch from
an automatic transmission, the While driving, only shut the
ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after
shift lever must be in P (Park) to vehicle off in an emergency.
five minutes to prevent battery
turn the ignition switch to the rundown.
LOCK/OFF position. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
and must be shut off while driving,
switch the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
ON/RUN/START (Green LED driven. The engine will not start in Notice: Do not try to shift to
Light): This mode is for driving and Service Only Mode. Push the button P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
starting. With the ignition off, and again to turn the vehicle off. If you do, you could damage the
the brake pedal applied, pressing transmission. Shift to P (Park)
the button once will place the Starting the Engine only when the vehicle is stopped.
ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
Once engine cranking begins, Place the transmission in the Manual Transmission
release the button. Engine cranking proper gear. The shift lever should be in Neutral
will continue until the engine Notice: The engine is designed to and the parking brake engaged.
starts. See Starting the Engine on work with the electronics in the Hold the clutch pedal down to the
page 9‑20 for more information. The vehicle. If you add electrical parts floor and start the engine. The
ignition will then remain in ON/RUN. or accessories, you could change vehicle will not start if the clutch
the way the engine operates. pedal is not all the way down.
Service Only Mode
Before adding electrical
This power mode is available for Starting Procedure (Key Access)
equipment, check with your
service and diagnostics, and to dealer. If you do not, the engine 1. With your foot off the accelerator
verify the proper operation of the might not perform properly. Any pedal, turn the ignition key to
malfunction indicator lamp as may resulting damage would not be START. When the engine starts,
be required for emission inspection covered by the vehicle warranty. let go of the key. The idle speed
purposes. With the vehicle off, and will go down as the engine
the brake pedal not applied, Automatic Transmission warms. Do not race the engine
pressing and holding the button for Move the shift lever to P (Park) or immediately after starting it.
more than five seconds will place N (Neutral). The engine will not start Allow the oil to warm up and
the vehicle in Service Only Mode. in any other position. To restart the lubricate all moving parts.
The instruments and audio systems vehicle when it is already moving, The vehicle has a
will operate as they do in ON/RUN, use N (Neutral) only. Computer-Controlled Cranking
but the vehicle will not be able to be System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is 2. If the engine does not start after Starting Procedure
turned to the START position, five to 10 seconds, especially (Keyless Access)
and then released when the in very cold weather (below 0°F 1. If the vehicle has the keyless
engine begins cranking, the or −18°C), it could be flooded access system, the transmitter
engine will continue cranking with too much gasoline. must be in the vehicle. Put your
for a few seconds or until the Push the accelerator pedal all foot on the brake pedal and
vehicle starts. If the engine does the way to the floor and hold it push the START/STOP button.
not start and the key is held in there as you hold the key in When the engine begins
START for many seconds, START for a maximum of cranking, let go of the button.
cranking stops after 15 seconds 15 seconds. Wait at least
to prevent cranking motor 15 seconds between each try, to The idle speed will go down as
damage. To prevent gear allow the cranking motor to cool. your engine gets warm. Do not
damage, this system also When the engine starts, let go of race the engine immediately
prevents cranking if the engine the key and accelerator. If the after starting it. Operate the
is already running. Engine vehicle starts briefly but then engine and transmission gently
cranking can be stopped by stops again, repeat the to allow the oil to warm up and
turning the ignition switch to procedure. This clears the extra lubricate all moving parts.
ACC/ACCESSORY or gasoline from the engine. Do not If the transmitter is not in the
LOCK/OFF. race the engine immediately vehicle or something is
Notice: Cranking the engine for after starting it. Operate the interfering with the transmitter,
long periods of time, by returning engine and transmission gently the Driver Information Center
the key to the START position until the oil warms up and (DIC) will display NO REMOTE
immediately after cranking has lubricates all moving parts. DETECTED. See Driver
ended, can overheat and damage Information Center (DIC) on
the cranking motor, and drain the page 5‑23 for more information.
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
If the battery in the keyless To prevent gear damage, this Wait at least 15 seconds
access transmitter needs system also prevents cranking if between each try, to allow the
replacing, the DIC displays the engine is already running. cranking motor to cool down.
REPLACE BATTERY IN Engine cranking can be stopped When the engine starts, let go of
REMOTE KEY. The vehicle can by pressing the START button a the key or button, and the
still be driven. See “Starting the second time. accelerator. If the vehicle starts
Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Notice: Cranking the engine for briefly but then stops again, do
Battery” in Remote Keyless long periods of time, by returning the same thing. This clears the
Entry (RKE) System Operation the key to the START position extra gasoline from the engine.
on page 2‑3 for more immediately after cranking has Do not race the engine
information. ended, can overheat and damage immediately after starting it.
The vehicle has a the cranking motor, and drain the Operate the engine and
Computer-Controlled Cranking battery. Wait at least 15 seconds transmission gently until the oil
System. This feature assists in between each try, to let the warms up and lubricates all
starting the engine and protects cranking motor cool down. moving parts.
components. If the START 2. If the engine does not start after
button is pressed, and then Engine Heater
five to 10 seconds, especially in
released when the engine very cold weather (below −18°C The engine heater, if available, can
begins cranking, the engine will or 0°F), it could be flooded with help in cold weather conditions at or
continue cranking for a few too much gasoline. Try pushing below −18°C (0°F) for easier starting
seconds or until the vehicle the accelerator pedal all the way and better fuel economy during
starts. If the engine does not to the floor and holding it there engine warm-up. Plug in the heater
start and the button is pressed as you hold the key in START, at least four hours before starting
for many seconds, cranking will or press the START button, for the vehicle. An internal thermostat
be stopped after 15 seconds to up to a maximum of 15 seconds. in the plug end of the cord will
prevent cranking motor damage. prevent engine heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
To Use The Engine Heater Retained Accessory

1. Turn off the engine.
{ WARNING Power (RAP)
Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories may be
ungrounded outlet could cause an used for up to 10 minutes after the
electrical shock. Also, the wrong engine is turned off:
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
. Audio System
could be seriously injured. Plug . Power Windows
the cord into a properly grounded . Sunroof
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a The power windows and sunroof will
heavy-duty three-prong extension continue to work for up to
cord rated for at least 15 amps. 10 minutes or until any door is
opened. The radio will work when
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Similar 4. Before starting the engine, be ACCESSORY. Once the key is
2. Open the hood and unwrap the sure to unplug and store the turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
electrical cord. The electrical cord as it was before to keep it the radio will continue to work for
cord is located on the passenger away from moving engine parts. 10 minutes, or until the driver door is
side of the engine compartment, If you do not it could be opened or the key is removed from
behind the air cleaner. damaged. the ignition.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded The length of time the heater should
110-volt AC outlet. remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Shifting Into Park 2. Hold the button on the shift lever Release the button and check that
and push the lever toward the the shift lever cannot be moved out
(Automatic Transmission) front of the vehicle into P (Park). of P (Park).
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
{ WARNING Torque Lock
4. Remove the key. Torque lock is when the weight of
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle puts too much force on
the vehicle if the shift lever is not Leaving the Vehicle with the
the parking pawl in the
fully in P (Park) with the parking Engine Running transmission. This happens when
brake firmly set. The vehicle can parking on a hill and shifting the
roll. If you have left the engine { WARNING transmission into P (Park) is not
running, the vehicle can move done properly and then it is difficult
suddenly. You or others could be It can be dangerous to leave the to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
injured. To be sure the vehicle will vehicle with the engine running. torque lock, set the parking brake
not move, even when you are on The vehicle could move suddenly and then shift into P (Park). To find
fairly level ground, use the steps if the shift lever is not fully in out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
that follow. If you are pulling a P (Park) with the parking brake listed previously.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics firmly set. And, if you leave the
If torque lock does occur, the
and Towing Tips on page 9‑49. vehicle with the engine running, it
vehicle may need to be pushed
could overheat and even catch uphill by another vehicle to relieve
fire. You or others could be the parking pawl pressure, so you
Use this procedure to shift into injured. Do not leave the vehicle
P (Park): can shift out of P (Park).
with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
See Parking Brake on page 9‑36 the engine running, the vehicle must
for more information. be in P (Park) and the parking
brake set.
Shifting out of Park The shift lock release is always If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
functional except in the case of an 1. Fully release the shift lever
This vehicle is equipped with an uncharged or low voltage (less than
automatic transmission shift lock button.
9‐volt) battery.
control system. The shift lock is 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
designed to: If the vehicle has an uncharged press the shift lever button
battery or a battery with low voltage, again.
. Prevent ignition key removal try charging or jump starting the
unless the shift lever is in battery. See Jump Starting on 3. Move the shift lever to the
P (Park) with the shift lever page 10‑80 desired position.
button fully released.
To shift out of P (Park): If the shift lever still cannot be
. Prevent movement of the shift moved from P (Park), see
lever out of P (Park) unless the 1. Apply the brake pedal. “Shift Lock Manual Release.”
ignition is in ON/RUN and the 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
brake pedal is applied.
3. Press the shift lever button.
4. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Shift Lock Manual Release

The automatic transmission has an
electric park lock. The key must be
in the ON/RUN position, and the
brake pedal pressed so the shift
lever can be moved from the
P (Park) position. If the battery has
lost power, the shift lever cannot be
moved from P (Park) unless the
shift lock manual release is
disengaged manually.
To access the shift lock manual
release: 2. Open the cover to the right of 3. Insert a tool into the opening as
the shift lever. far as it will go and move the
1. Apply the parking brake. shift lever out of P (Park).
If P (Park) is selected again, the
shift lever will be locked again.
Have the cause of the problem
fixed by your dealer.
4. Close the cover.
Parking Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, before getting out of { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
R (Reverse), and firmly apply the Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
parking brake. Once the shift lever monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
has been placed into R (Reverse) seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
with the clutch pedal pressed in, can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF, and even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
release the clutch. coming into the vehicle:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle . Drive it only with the windows
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑49. garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Parking over Things Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or
That Burn sounds strange or different.
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
{ WARNING . The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Things that can burn could touch . The vehicle exhaust system
hot exhaust parts under the has been modified, damaged
vehicle and ignite. Do not park or improperly repaired.
over papers, leaves, dry grass, (Continued)
or other things that can burn.
Running the Vehicle Follow the proper steps to be

While Parked
{ WARNING sure the vehicle will not move.
If the vehicle has an automatic
It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out of transmission, see Shifting Into Park
engine running. But if you ever have the vehicle if the automatic (Automatic Transmission) on
to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully page 9‑24. If the vehicle has a
in P (Park) with the parking brake manual transmission, see Parking
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
{ WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when
on page 9‑27.
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed the engine is running unless you
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can page 9‑49.
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
It can cause unconsciousness it is on fairly level ground, always
and even death. Never run the set the parking brake and move
engine in an enclosed area that the automatic transmission shift
has no fresh air ventilation. For lever to P (Park), or the manual
more information, see Engine transmission shift lever to Neutral.
Exhaust on page 9‑27.
Automatic WARNING (Continued)

Transmission Do not leave the vehicle when the
The automatic transmission has a engine is running unless you
shift lever located on the console have to. If you have left the
between the seats. engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on level ground, always
set the parking brake and move
English Shown, Metric Similar the shift lever to P (Park). See
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
P (Park): This position locks the Transmission) on page 9‑24.
drive wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot Make sure the shift lever is fully in
move easily. P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
The selected gear is also shown in { WARNING transmission shift lock control
system. The regular brake must be
the instrument cluster.
It is dangerous to get out of the fully applied first and then the shift
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully lever button pressed before shifting
in P (Park) with the parking brake from P (Park) when the ignition key
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. is in ON/RUN.
(Continued)
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), N (Neutral) only. Also, use damage the transmission. The
ease pressure on the shift lever, N (Neutral) when the vehicle is repairs would not be covered by
then push the shift lever all the way being towed. the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
into P (Park) as you maintain brake The vehicle has an automatic engine is not running at high
application. Then press the shift neutral shift feature which allows the speed when shifting the vehicle.
lever button and move the shift lever transmission to automatically shift to D (Drive): This position is for
into another gear. See Shifting out N (Neutral) when the vehicle is normal driving. It provides the best
of Park on page 9‑25. stopped with a forward gear fuel economy. If more power is
R (Reverse): Use this gear to engaged. The reduced load on the needed for passing, and the
back up. engine improves vehicle fuel vehicle is:
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) economy. . Going less than 56 km/h
while the vehicle is moving (35 mph), push the accelerator
forward could damage the { WARNING pedal about halfway down.
transmission. The repairs would . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
not be covered by the vehicle Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is more, push the accelerator all
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only the way down.
after the vehicle is stopped. dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the Notice: If the vehicle seems to
To rock the vehicle back and forth to vehicle could move very rapidly. accelerate slowly or not shift
get out of snow, ice, or sand without gears when you go faster, and
You could lose control and hit
damaging the transmission, see If you continue to drive the vehicle
people or objects. Do not shift
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10. that way, you could damage the
into a drive gear while the engine
N (Neutral): In this position, the is running at high speed. transmission. Have the vehicle
engine does not connect with the serviced right away.
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
All Models Except Fuel Economy
Model
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
DSC allows you to shift an 1. Move the shift lever from 2. Press the shift lever forward (+)
automatic transmission similar to a D (Drive) to the left into the (+) or to upshift or rearward (−) to
manual transmission. (−) manual position. downshift. An M and the current
gear will be displayed in the DIC.
While using the DSC feature, the When accelerating the vehicle from gear under manual mode and the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker a stop in snowy and icy conditions, driving conditions when manual
shifting. You can use this for you may want to shift into second mode was selected.
sport driving or when climbing or gear. A higher gear allows the 1. Move the shift lever from
descending hills, to stay in gear vehicle to gain more traction on D (Drive) to the left into the (+) or
longer, or to downshift for more slippery surfaces. (−) manual position.
power or engine braking.
Electronic Range Select 2. Press the shift lever forward (+)
The transmission will only allow (ERS) Mode to upshift or rearward (−) to
you to shift into gears appropriate downshift. An M and the current
for the vehicle speed and engine Fuel Economy Model
gear will be displayed in the DIC.
revolutions per minute (rpm). The Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
transmission will not automatically When shifting to M (Manual Mode),
a high rpm without upshifting
shift to the next lower gear if the the transmission will shift to the
while using Electronic Range
engine rpm is too high, nor to range of the current gear. For this
Select (ERS), you could damage
the next higher gear when the range, the highest gear available is
the vehicle. Always upshift when
maximum engine rpm is reached. displayed next to the M in the DIC.
necessary while using ERS.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
If shifting is prevented for any ERS allows for the selection of the on page 5‑23 for more information.
reason, the currently selected gear range of gear positions. Use this All gears below that number are
will flash multiple times, indicating mode when driving downhill or available to use. For example, when
that the transmission has not towing a trailer to limit the top gear 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,
shifted gears. and vehicle speed. The shift 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
While in the DSC mode, the position indicator within the shifted automatically. To shift to
transmission will automatically Driver Information Center (DIC) 5 (Fifth) gear, press the shift lever
downshift when the vehicle comes will display a number next to the forward (+) to upshift or shift into
to a stop. This will allow for more M indicating the highest available D (Drive).
power during take-off.
M (Manual Mode) will prevent Manual Transmission Notice: Do not rest your foot on
shifting to a lower gear range if the the clutch pedal while driving or
engine speed is too high. If vehicle Shift Pattern while stopped. The pressure can
speed is not reduced within the time cause premature wear in the
allowed, the lower gear range shift clutch. The repairs would not be
will not be completed. Slow the covered by the vehicle warranty.
vehicle, then press the shift lever 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
rearward (−) to downshift to the fully to the pedal stop and shift into
desired lower gear range. 1 (First). Then slowly let up on the
While using the ERS, cruise control All Models Fuel Economy clutch pedal as you press the
can be used. Except Fuel Model accelerator pedal.
Economy Model
If you come to a complete stop and
These are the shift patterns for the it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put
six-speed manual transmissions. the shift lever in Neutral and let up
on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal
To operate the transmissions: back down. Then shift into 1 (First).
Notice: Do not rest your hand on 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
the shift lever while driving. The fully to the pedal stop as you let up
pressure could cause premature on the accelerator pedal and shift
wear in the transmission. The into 2 (Second). Then, slowly let up
repairs would not be covered by on the clutch pedal as you press the
the vehicle warranty. accelerator pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and To stop, let up on the accelerator into R (Reverse). Let up on the
6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third), pedal and press the brake pedal. clutch pedal slowly while pressing
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the Just before the vehicle stops, press the accelerator pedal.
same way you do for 2 (Second). the clutch pedal and the brake If the gear does not engage, shift
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as pedal, and shift to Neutral. the transmission to Neutral, release
you press the accelerator pedal. Neutral: Use this position when the clutch pedal and press it back
For the best fuel economy, use you start or idle the engine. The down. Repeat the gear selection.
6 (Sixth) gear whenever vehicle shift lever is in Neutral when it is
speed and driving conditions allow. centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
{ WARNING
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
An up-shift light in the instrument
cluster indicates when to shift to the
next higher gear for the best fuel Notice: Do not skip gears
economy. while upshifting. This can
cause premature wear in the
During normal driving, upshifts transmission. The repairs would
should occur between 1,300 and not be covered by the vehicle
2,500 rpm, and downshifts should warranty.
occur between 1,500 and
1,000 rpm. R (Reverse): To back up, with the
vehicle at a complete stop, press
down the clutch pedal. Then pull up
the ring on the shift lever, and shift
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
When the engine is started and the normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
checks itself. A momentary motor or
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while ABS allows the driver to steer and
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might brake at the same time. In many
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this there will not be enough time to
warning light stays on. See Antilock apply the brakes if that vehicle
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑17.
Parking Brake To release the parking brake: If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
1. Hold the brake pedal down. is pulling a trailer, see Driving
2. Pull the parking brake handle up page 9‑49.
until you can press the release
button. Brake Assist
3. Hold the release button in as This vehicle has a brake assist
you move the brake handle all feature designed to assist the
the way down. driver in stopping or decreasing
Notice: Driving with the parking vehicle speed in emergency driving
brake on can overheat the brake conditions. This feature uses the
system and cause premature stability system hydraulic brake
wear or damage to brake system control module to supplement the
parts. Make sure that the parking power brake system under
To apply the parking brake, pull up brake is fully released and the conditions where the driver has
on the parking brake handle. It is brake warning light is off before quickly and forcefully applied the
not necessary to push in on the driving. brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
release button while applying the stop or slow down the vehicle.
Driving with the parking brake
parking brake. If the ignition is in the The stability system hydraulic brake
applied will cause a warning chime
ON/RUN position, the brake system control module increases brake
to sound and the RELEASE
warning light will come on. See pressure at each corner of the
PARKING BRAKE message to
Brake System Warning Light on vehicle until the ABS activates.
appear in the DIC. The message will
page 5‑16.
remain on until the parking brake is
released or the vehicle is stopped.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or Ride Control Systems

pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal Traction Control
as the driving situation dictates. System (TCS)
The brake assist feature will
The vehicle has a Traction Control
automatically disengage when the TCS/StabiliTrak Light
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the d flashes to indicate that the
system operates if it senses that traction control system is active.
decreased.
one or both of the front wheels are
If there is a problem detected with
spinning or beginning to lose
TCS, SERVICE TRACTION
traction. When this happens, the
CONTROL and SERVICE
system brakes the spinning
STABILITRAK may be displayed on
wheel(s), and/or reduces engine
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
power to limit wheel spin.
See Vehicle Messages (Canada
The system may be heard or felt Base Level) on page 5‑28 or
while it is working, but this is Vehicle Messages (Canada Uplevel
normal. and United States) on page 5‑28.
TCS is on whenever the vehicle is When this message is displayed
started. To limit wheel spin, and d comes on and stays on, the
especially in slippery road vehicle is safe to drive but the
conditions, the system should system is not operational. Driving
always be left on. But, TCS can should be adjusted accordingly.
be turned off if needed.
If d comes on and stays on, reset Press the cruise control button to
the system: reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
1. Stop the vehicle. page 9‑40.
2. Turn the engine off and wait Adding non‐GM accessories can
15 seconds. affect the vehicle's performance.
TCS Off Light See Accessories and Modifications
3. Start the engine.
TCS can be turned off by pressing on page 10‑3 for more information.
If d still comes on and stays on at a
and releasing g. When TCS is
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
turned off, i comes on and the
StabiliTrak® System
your dealer for service.
system will not limit wheel spin. The vehicle has a vehicle stability
A chime may also sound when the Driving should be adjusted enhancement system called
light comes on steady. StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
accordingly. Press and release g
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake again to turn the system back on. computer controlled system that
or accelerate heavily when TCS is assists with directional control of the
off. The vehicle's driveline could It may be necessary to turn the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
be damaged. system off if the vehicle gets stuck
in sand, mud, or snow and rocking StabiliTrak activates when the
the vehicle is required. See If the computer senses a difference
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10 for between the intended path, and the
more information. See also Winter direction the vehicle is actually
Driving on page 9‑8 for information traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
on using TCS when driving in snowy applies braking pressure at any one
or icy conditions. of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
TCS/StabiliTrak Button the vehicle in the intended direction.
If cruise control is being used when
g is located on the console. TCS activates, cruise control will
automatically disengage.
StabiliTrak is on automatically and United States) on page 5‑28.

whenever the vehicle is started. To When this message is displayed
assist with directional control of the and/or d comes on and stays on,
vehicle, the system should always the vehicle is safe to drive but the
be left on. system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
StabiliTrak Off TCS Off Light
If d comes on and stays on, reset Light
the system:
1. Stop the vehicle. StabiliTrak can be turned off if
needed by pressing and holding g
2. Turn the engine off and wait
TCS/StabiliTrak Light 15 seconds. until g and i come on the
When the stability control system instrument panel. When StabiliTrak
3. Start the engine. is turned off, the system will not
activates, d flashes on the
If d still comes on and stays on at a assist with directional control of the
instrument panel. This also occurs
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see vehicle or limit wheel spin. Driving
when traction control is activated.
your dealer for service. should be adjusted accordingly.
A noise may be heard or vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal. This Press and release g again to turn
is normal. Continue to steer the the system back on.
vehicle in the intended direction. If cruise control is being used when
If there is a problem detected StabiliTrak activates, cruise control
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE will automatically disengage. Press
STABILITRAK is displayed on the the cruise control button to
Driver Information Center (DIC). TCS/StabiliTrak Button reengage when road conditions
See Vehicle Messages (Canada allow. See Cruise Control on
g is located on the console. page 9‑40 for more information.
Base Level) on page 5‑28 or
Vehicle Messages (Canada Uplevel
Cruise Control { WARNING

For vehicles with cruise control, the
vehicle can maintain a speed of Cruise control can be dangerous
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more where you cannot drive safely at
without keeping your foot on the a steady speed. So, do not use
accelerator. Cruise control does the cruise control on winding
not work at speeds below roads or in heavy traffic.
40 km/h (25 mph). Cruise control can be dangerous
If the brakes are applied, the on slippery roads. On such roads,
cruise control shuts off. fast changes in tire traction can
The vehicle has a Traction Control cause excessive wheel slip, and
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak system you could lose control. Do not use
that begins to limit wheel spin while cruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
using cruise control and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):
See Traction Control System (TCS) Move the thumbwheel up to resume
on page 9‑37 or StabiliTrak® System a previously set speed or to
on page 9‑38. When road conditions accelerate.
allow you to safely use it again, the SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
cruise control can be turned on. thumbwheel down to set a speed or
to make the vehicle decelerate.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts,
Cruise Control move the thumbwheel toward
If the cruise button is on when not in SET/− briefly. Each time this is
use, it could get bumped and go into If the cruise control system is done, the vehicle goes about
cruise when not desired. Keep the already activated: 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
cruise control switch off when cruise . Move the thumbwheel up toward
is not being used. Passing Another Vehicle While
RES/+ and hold it until the
Using Cruise Control
1. Press 1. desired speed is reached, then
release it. Use the accelerator pedal to
2. Get to the speed desired. increase the vehicle speed. When
. To increase the speed in small
3. Move the thumbwheel down and you take your foot off the pedal, the
amounts, move the thumbwheel
release it. vehicle slows down to the previous
up toward RES/+ briefly and
set cruise control speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator then release it. Each time this is
pedal. done, the vehicle goes about Using Cruise Control on Hills
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Resuming a Set Speed How well the cruise control works
Reducing Speed While Using on hills depends upon the vehicle
If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control speed, load, and the steepness of
desired speed and then the brakes the hills. When going up steep hills,
or clutch for manual transmissions If the cruise control system is
you might have to step on the
are applied, the cruise control is already activated:
accelerator pedal to maintain the
disengaged without erasing the set . Move the thumbwheel toward vehicle speed. When going
speed from memory. SET/− and hold until the desired downhill, you might have to brake or
Once the vehicle reaches about lower speed is reached, then shift to a lower gear to maintain the
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move release it. vehicle speed. When the brakes are
the thumbwheel up toward RES/+ applied, the cruise control is
briefly. The vehicle returns to the disengaged.
speed selected previously and
stays there.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection WARNING (Continued)

There are three ways to end cruise
control:
Systems
or vehicle damage, even with
. To disengage cruise control, Ultrasonic Parking Assist URPA, always check behind the
step lightly on the brake pedal or vehicle and check all mirrors
clutch for a manual transmission. For vehicles with the Ultrasonic before backing.
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
. Press * on the steering wheel. it assists the driver with parking
. To turn off cruise control, press and avoiding objects while in How the System Works
1 on the steering wheel. R (Reverse). URPA operates at URPA comes on automatically
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). when the shift lever is moved into
Erasing Speed Memory The sensors on the rear bumper R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
The cruise control set speed is detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) to indicate the system is working.
behind the vehicle, and at least
erased from memory if 1 is pressed URPA operates only at speeds less
20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
or if the ignition is turned off. than 8 km/h (5 mph).
{ WARNING An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
The URPA system does not beeps becomes shorter as the
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
animals, or any other objects When the distance is less than
located below the bumper or that 30 cm (12 in), the beeping is a
are too close or too far from the continuous tone for five seconds.
vehicle. To prevent injury, death,
(Continued)
To be detected, objects must be at When the System Does Not

. The park assist sensors are
least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and Seem to Work Properly covered by frost or ice. Frost or
below trunk level. Objects must also ice can form around and behind
be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear The following messages may be the sensors and may not always
bumper. The distance objects can displayed on the DIC: be seen; this can occur after
be detected may be less during SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: washing the vehicle in cold
warmer or humid weather. If this message occurs, take the weather. The message may not
vehicle to your dealer to repair the clear until the frost or ice has
Turning the System On and Off system. melted.
The URPA system can be turned PARK ASSIST Off: If the URPA
. An object was hanging out of the
on and off using the infotainment system does not activate due to a trunk during the last drive cycle.
system controls. See Vehicle temporary condition, the message Once the object is removed,
Personalization on page 5‑34 for displays on the DIC. This can occur URPA will return to normal
more information. under the following conditions: operation.
When the system is off, PARK . The driver has disabled the
. The bumper is damaged. Take
ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver system. the vehicle to your dealer to
Information Center (DIC). The repair the system.
message disappears after a short . The ultrasonic sensors are not
. Other conditions, such as
period of time. clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, vibrations from a jackhammer or
URPA defaults to the on setting ice, and slush. For cleaning the compression of air brakes on
each time the vehicle is started. instructions, see Exterior Care a very large truck, are affecting
on page 10‑86. system performance.
Fuel Gasoline Specifications

Use of the recommended fuel is an (U.S. and Canada Only)
important part of the proper At a minimum, gasoline should meet
maintenance of this vehicle. To help ASTM specification D 4814 in the
keep the engine clean and maintain United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or
optimum vehicle performance, we 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
recommend the use of gasoline contain an octane-enhancing
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent additive called
Gasoline. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
Look for the TOP TIER label on the tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets against the use of gasolines
enhanced detergency standards containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel on page 9‑45 for additional
of marketers providing TOP TIER information.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or
www.toptiergas.com. higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
California Fuel Fuels in Foreign regulations. To help keep fuel

injectors and intake valves clean
Requirements Countries and avoid problems due to dirty
If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any injectors or valves, look for gasoline
California Emissions Standards, it is other fuel not recommended in the that is advertised as TOP TIER
designed to operate on fuels that previous text on fuel. Costly repairs Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
meet California specifications. See caused by use of improper fuel TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
the underhood emission control would not be covered by the ensure gasoline meets enhanced
label. If this fuel is not available in vehicle warranty. detergency standards developed by
states adopting California Emissions the auto companies. A list of
To check the fuel availability, ask an
Standards, the vehicle will operate marketers providing TOP TIER
auto club, or contact a major oil
satisfactorily on fuels meeting Detergent Gasoline can be found at
company that does business in the
federal specifications, but emission www.toptiergas.com.
country where you will be driving.
control system performance might For customers who do not use TOP
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the Fuel Additives TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on in the United States are now tank at every engine oil change, can
page 5‑13. If this occurs, return to required to contain additives that help clean deposits from fuel
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. help prevent engine and fuel system injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
If it is determined that the condition deposits from forming, allowing the System Treatment PLUS is the only
is caused by the type of fuel used, emission control system to work gasoline additive recommended by
repairs might not be covered by the properly. In most cases, nothing General Motors. It is available at
vehicle warranty. should have to be added to the fuel. your dealer.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
Gasolines containing oxygenates, fuel contains MMT. We recommend

such as ethers and ethanol, and against the use of such gasolines. WARNING (Continued)
reformulated gasolines might be Fuels containing MMT can reduce
available in your area. We spark plug life and affect emission vehicle. This is against the law in
recommend that you use these control system performance. The some places. Do not re-enter the
gasolines, if they comply with the malfunction indicator lamp might vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep
specifications described earlier. turn on. If this occurs, return to your children away from the fuel pump;
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and dealer for service. never let children pump fuel.
other fuels containing more than
15% ethanol must not be used in Filling the Tank
vehicles that were not designed
for those fuels.
{ WARNING
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains Fuel vapor burns violently and a
methanol. Do not use fuel fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
containing methanol. It can To help avoid injuries to you and
corrode metal parts in the fuel others, read and follow all the
system and also damage plastic instructions on the fuel pump
and rubber parts. That damage island. Turn off the engine when
would not be covered under the refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
vehicle warranty. or when refueling the vehicle.
Some gasolines that are Do not use cellular phones.
not reformulated for low Keep sparks, flames, and The tethered fuel cap is behind the
emissions can contain an smoking materials away from fuel. fuel door on the vehicle's passenger
octane-enhancing additive called Do not leave the fuel pump side. To open the fuel door, push the
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese unattended when refueling the rearward center edge in and release
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant and the door will open. Turn the fuel
(Continued) cap counterclockwise to remove.
where you buy gasoline whether the
Do not release the cap too soon or Notice: If a new fuel cap is
it will spring back. Reinstall the cap WARNING (Continued) needed, be sure to get the right
by turning it clockwise until it clicks. type of cap from your dealer. The
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait wrong type of fuel cap might not
If the cap is not properly installed,
for any hiss noise to stop. Then fit properly, might cause the
the malfunction indicator lamp will
come on. See Malfunction Indicator unscrew the cap all the way. malfunction indicator lamp to
Lamp on page 5‑13 for more light, and could damage the fuel
information. tank and emissions system. See
Do not top off or overfill the tank.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
Wait a few seconds before removing
page 5‑13.
{ WARNING the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Fuel can spray out on you if you Exterior Care on page 10‑86.
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then { WARNING
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can If a fire starts while you are
happen if the tank is nearly full, refueling, do not remove the
and is more likely in hot weather. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
(Continued) shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
General Towing
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill Information
Never fill a portable fuel container opening before operating the Only use towing equipment that has
while it is in the vehicle. Static nozzle. Contact should be been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the maintained until the filling is Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel complete. dealer for assistance with preparing
vapor. You can be badly burned the vehicle for towing a trailer.
. Do not smoke while
and the vehicle damaged if pumping fuel. See the following trailer towing
this occurs. To help avoid injury to information in this section:
. Do not use a cellular phone
you and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving while
. Dispense fuel only into towing a trailer, see “Driving
approved containers. Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)

. For information on equipment to With the added weight, the engine,
tow a trailer, see “Towing WARNING (Continued) transmission, wheel assemblies,
Equipment.” and tires are forced to work harder
For information on towing a disabled The driver and passengers could and under greater loads. The trailer
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on be seriously injured. The vehicle also adds wind resistance,
page 10‑83. For information on may also be damaged; the increasing the pulling requirements.
towing the vehicle behind another resulting repairs would not be For safe trailering, correctly use the
vehicle such as a motor home, see covered by the vehicle warranty. proper trailering equipment.
Recreational Vehicle Towing on Pull a trailer only if all the steps in The following information has
page 10‑84. this section have been followed. important trailering tips and rules for
Ask your dealer for advice and your safety and that of your
Driving Characteristics information about towing a trailer passengers. Read this section
and Towing Tips with the vehicle. carefully before pulling a trailer.
Pulling a Trailer
{ WARNING The vehicle can tow a trailer if
Here are some important points:
it is equipped with the proper trailer
The driver can lose control when towing equipment. To identify the . There are many laws, including
pulling a trailer if the correct trailering capacity of the vehicle, speed limit restrictions that apply
equipment is not used or the see Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy to trailering. Check for legal
vehicle is not driven properly. Model) on page 9‑53 or Trailer requirements with state or
For example, if the trailer is too Towing (Except Fuel Economy provincial police.
heavy, the brakes may not work Model) on page 9‑53. Trailering . Do not tow a trailer at all during
well — or even at all. changes handling, acceleration,
the first 1 600 km (1,000 mi) the
braking, durability, and fuel
(Continued) new vehicle is driven. The
economy.
engine or other parts could be
damaged.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi) Driving with a Trailer trailer, which mainly occurs during
that a trailer is towed, do not cornering. This is normal when
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and Towing a trailer requires experience.
towing heavier trailers.
do not make starts at full throttle. Get familiar with handling and
This reduces wear on the braking with the added trailer Following Distance
vehicle. weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the Stay at least twice as far behind the
. Vehicles with automatic vehicle is by itself. vehicle ahead as you would when
transmissions can tow in driving the vehicle without a trailer.
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode) Check all trailer hitch parts and This can help to avoid situations
is recommended. See Manual attachments, safety chains, that require heavy braking and
Mode on page 9‑31 for more electrical connectors, lamps, tires, sudden turns.
information. Use a lower gear if and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
the transmission shifts too often. has electric brakes, start the vehicle Passing
For vehicles with a manual and trailer moving and then apply More passing distance is needed
transmission, it is better not to the trailer brake controller by hand when towing a trailer. Because the
use the highest gear. to be sure the brakes are working. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
. Use the cruise control when During the trip, check regularly to much farther beyond the passed
towing. be sure that the load is secure, and vehicle before returning to the lane.
the lamps and trailer brakes are
. Obey speed limit restrictions. Backing Up
working properly.
Do not drive faster than the Hold the bottom of the steering
maximum posted speed for Towing with a Stability Control wheel with one hand. Then, to move
trailers, or no more than System the trailer to the left, move that hand
90 km/h (55 mph), to reduce to the left. To move the trailer to the
When towing, the sound of the
wear on the vehicle. right, move your hand to the right.
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the Always back up slowly and,
vehicle movement caused by the if possible, have someone
guide you.
Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on For vehicles with a manual
the instrument panel flash for turns transmission, it is better not to
Notice: Making very sharp turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are use the highest gear.
while trailering could cause the
burned out. For this reason you may When towing at high altitude on
trailer to come in contact with the
think other drivers are seeing the steep uphill grades, consider the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
signal when they are not. It is following: Engine coolant will boil at
damaged. Avoid making very
important to check occasionally to a lower temperature than at normal
sharp turns while trailering.
be sure the trailer bulbs are still altitudes. If the engine is turned off
When turning with a trailer, make working. immediately after towing at high
wider turns than normal. Do this so
Driving On Grades altitude on steep uphill grades, the
the trailer will not strike soft
vehicle may show signs similar to
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, Reduce speed and shift to a lower engine overheating. To avoid this,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or gear before starting down a long or let the engine run while parked,
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in steep downgrade. If the preferably on level ground, with the
advance. transmission is not shifted down, the automatic transmission in P (Park)
brakes might have to be used so for a few minutes before turning the
Turn Signals When Towing a much that they would get hot and no
Trailer engine off. For vehicles with manual
longer work well. transmissions, let the engine run
The arrows on the instrument panel Vehicles with an automatic while parked, preferably on level
flash whenever signaling a turn or transmission can tow in ground, with the transmission out of
lane change. Properly hooked up, D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode) gear and the parking brake applied,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling is recommended. Shift the for a few minutes before turning the
other drivers the vehicle is turning, transmission to a lower gear if the engine off. If the overheat warning
changing lanes, or stopping. transmission shifts too often under comes on, see Engine Overheating
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. on page 10‑19.
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer
place, release the brake pedal Towing
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load.
The vehicle needs service more
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or
the trailer attached can be into P (Park) for vehicles with an Index for more information. Things
dangerous. If something goes automatic transmission or into that are especially important in
wrong, the rig could start to move. gear for vehicles with a manual trailer operation are automatic
People can be injured, and both transmission. transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
the vehicle and the trailer can be 5. Release the brake pedal. lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
damaged. When possible, always brake system. It is a good idea to
park the rig on a flat surface. Leaving After Parking on a Hill inspect these before and during
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal the trip.
If parking the rig on a hill: while you: Check periodically to see that all
1. Press the brake pedal, but do 1.1. Start the engine. hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
not shift into P (Park) yet for 1.2. Shift into a gear. Engine Cooling When Trailer
vehicles with an automatic Towing
transmission, or into gear for 1.3. Release the parking brake.
vehicles with a manual 2. Let up on the brake pedal. The cooling system may temporarily
transmission. Turn the wheels overheat during severe operating
into the curb if facing downhill or 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is conditions. See Engine Overheating
into traffic if facing uphill. clear of the chocks. on page 10‑19.
2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up
under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks.
Trailer Towing Weight of the Trailer Maximum trailer weight is calculated

assuming only the driver is in the
(Fuel Economy Model) How heavy can a trailer safely be?
tow vehicle and it has all the
The vehicle is neither designed nor It should never weigh more than required trailering equipment.
intended to tow a trailer. 454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that The weight of additional optional
can be too heavy. equipment, passengers, and
Trailer Towing (Except It depends on how the rig is used. cargo in the tow vehicle must
be subtracted from the maximum
Fuel Economy Model) For example, speed, altitude, road
trailer weight.
grades, outside temperature, and
Before pulling a trailer, there are how much the vehicle is used to Ask your dealer for trailering
three important considerations that pull a trailer are all important. It can information or advice, or write us at
have to do with weight: depend on any special equipment our Customer Assistance Offices.
. The weight of the trailer. on the vehicle, and the amount of See Customer Assistance Offices
tongue weight the vehicle can carry. on page 13‑3 for more information.
. The weight of the trailer tongue.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
. The total weight on your later in this section for more
vehicle's tires. information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue Total Weight on Your

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is Vehicle's Tires
an important weight to measure Be sure the vehicle's tires are
because it affects the total gross inflated to the upper limit for cold
weight of the vehicle. The Gross tires. These numbers can be found
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the on the Tire and Loading Information
curb weight of the vehicle, any label. See Vehicle Load Limits on
cargo carried in it, and the people page 9‑10. Make sure not to go over
who will be riding in the vehicle. the GVW limit for the vehicle,
If there are a lot of options, including the weight of the trailer
equipment, passengers, or cargo in tongue.
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
will also reduce the trailer weight the 10‐15 percent of the total loaded
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, trailer weight (B).
the tongue load must be added to
After loading the trailer, weigh the
the GVW because the vehicle will
trailer and then the tongue,
be carrying that weight, too. See
separately, to see if the weights are
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10
proper. If they are not, adjustments
for more information.
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Towing Equipment Safety Chains Conversions and

Hitches Always attach chains between the Add-Ons
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
Use the correct hitch equipment. safety chains under the tongue of
See your dealer or a hitch dealer the trailer to help prevent the tongue Add-On Electrical
for assistance. from contacting the road if it Equipment
. The rear bumper on the vehicle becomes separated from the hitch.
Notice: Do not add anything
is not intended for hitches. Do Leave enough slack so the rig can
electrical to the vehicle unless
not attach rental hitches or other turn. Never allow safety chains to
you check with your dealer first.
bumper-type hitches to it. Use drag on the ground.
Some electrical equipment can
only a frame-mounted hitch that Trailer Brakes damage the vehicle and the
does not attach to the bumper. damage would not be covered by
Does the trailer have its own the vehicle's warranty. Some
. Will any holes be made in the brakes? Be sure to read and follow
body of the vehicle when the add-on electrical equipment can
the instructions for the trailer brakes keep other components from
trailer hitch is installed? If there so they are installed, adjusted, and
are, seal the holes when the working as they should.
maintained properly.
hitch is removed. If the holes are Add-on equipment can drain the
not sealed, dirt, water, and Because the vehicle has antilock vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's the vehicle is not operating.
from the exhaust can get into the brake system. If this is done, both
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on brake systems will not work well, The vehicle has an airbag system.
page 9‑27. or at all. Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑30 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑31.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Bulb Replacement
General Information Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Overheated Engine Headlamps, Front Turn
California Proposition Protection Signal and Parking
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
California Perchlorate Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-31
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-34
Vehicle Checks Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-26 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Doing Your Own Automatic Transmission Shift Electrical System
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Lock Control Function
Electrical System
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Compartment Ignition Transmission Lock
Fuses and Circuit
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Park Brake and P (Park)
Engine Compartment
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade
Instrument Panel
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61 General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 For service and parts needs, visit
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Tire Sealant and your dealer. You will receive
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Storing the Tire Sealant and and supported service people.
Tire Terminology and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Genuine GM parts have one of
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 these marks:
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-80
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Jump Starting
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Towing
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Recreational Vehicle
When It Is Time for New Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Appearance Care
Different Size Tires and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Uniform Tire Quality Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to

complement and function with other
65 Warning Modifications systems on the vehicle. See your
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories or dealer to accessorize the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals making modifications to the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories
known to the State of California to can affect vehicle performance and installed by a dealer technician.
cause cancer and birth defects or safety, including such things as Also, see Adding Equipment to the
other reproductive harm. Engine airbags, braking, stability, ride and Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
exhaust, many parts and systems, handling, emissions systems, page 3‑31.
many fluids, and some component aerodynamics, durability, and
wear by-products contain and/or electronic systems like antilock
emit these chemicals. brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
California Perchlorate modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty.
Certain types of automotive
Damage to vehicle components
applications, such as airbag
resulting from modifications or the
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
installation or use of non‐GM
and lithium batteries contained in
certified parts, including control
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
module or software modifications, is
may contain perchlorate materials.
not covered under the terms of the
Special handling may be necessary.
vehicle warranty and may affect
For additional information, see
remaining warranty coverage for
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
affected parts.
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Hood

work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more To open the hood:
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
Service Work than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑12.
You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system.
vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own
try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Servicing the
without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
. Be sure you have sufficient page 3‑30.
knowledge, experience, the Keep a record with all parts receipts
proper replacement parts, and list the mileage and the date of
and tools before attempting any service work performed. See
any vehicle 1. Pull up on the hood release
Maintenance Records on
maintenance task. handle. It is located inside
page 11‑16.
the vehicle to the left of the
. Be sure to use the proper steering column.
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and English
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Vehicle Care 10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the
slot on the underside of the hood
and return the prop to its
retainer. The prop rod must click
into place when returning it to
the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle 3. Lift the hood and release the 2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
and push the secondary hood hood prop from its retainer, above the vehicle and release it
release handle toward the driver located above the radiator. so it fully latches. Check to
side of the vehicle. Securely place the hood prop make sure the hood is closed
into the slot on the underside of and repeat the process if
the hood. necessary.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
1.4L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
page 10‑14. See Jump Starting on See Jump Starting on
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See page 10‑80. page 10‑80.
“Checking Engine Oil” under F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes Block on page 10‑36.
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan on page 10‑22 and Hydraulic K. Windshield Washer Fluid
(Out of View). See Cooling Clutch on page 10‑14. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
System on page 10‑16. G. Battery on page 10‑25 (Under Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When Cover). page 10‑22.
to Add Engine Oil” under H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑16.
10-8 Vehicle Care
1.8L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Battery on page 10‑25 (Under Engine Oil

page 10‑14. Cover).
To ensure proper engine
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and performance and long life, careful
“Checking Engine Oil” under Pressure Cap. See Cooling attention must be paid to engine oil.
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. System on page 10‑16. Following these simple, but
C. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. important steps will help protect
View). See Cooling System on See Jump Starting on your investment:
page 10‑16. page 10‑80. . Always use engine oil approved
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When J. Engine Compartment Fuse to the proper specification and of
to Add Engine Oil” under Block on page 10‑36. the proper viscosity grade. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
K. Windshield Washer Fluid in this section.
E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
See Jump Starting on Fluid” under Washer Fluid on . Check the engine oil level
page 10‑80. page 10‑22. regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. Engine Oil” and “When to Add
See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes Engine Oil” in this section.
on page 10‑22 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 10‑14. . Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑12.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
It is a good idea to check the engine
gets above the cross-hatched
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
area that shows the proper
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
operating range, the engine could
must be on level ground. The
be damaged. You should drain
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
out the excess oil or limit driving
loop. See Engine Compartment
of the vehicle and seek a service
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
professional to remove the
location of the engine oil dipstick. If the oil is below the cross-hatched excess amount of oil.
Obtaining an accurate oil level area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil See Engine Compartment Overview
reading is essential:
and then recheck the level. See on page 10‑6 for the location of the
1. If the engine has been running “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in engine oil fill cap.
recently, turn off the engine and this section for an explanation of Add enough oil to put the level
allow several minutes for the oil what kind of oil to use. For engine somewhere in the proper operating
to drain back into the oil pan. oil crankcase capacity, see range. Push the dipstick all the way
Checking the oil level too soon Capacities and Specifications on back in when through.
after engine shutoff will not page 12‑2.
provide an accurate oil level
reading. Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it acceptable operating range
with a paper towel or cloth, then shown on the dipstick are harmful
push it back in all the way. to the engine. If you find that you
Remove it again, keeping the have an oil level above the
tip down, and check the level.
Vehicle Care 10-11
Selecting the Right Engine Oil If in an area of extreme cold, where

the temperature falls below −20°F
Selecting the right engine oil
(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should
depends on both the proper oil
be used. An oil of this viscosity
specification and viscosity grade.
grade will provide easier cold
See Recommended Fluids and
starting for the engine at extremely
Lubricants on page 11‑13.
Notice: Failure to use the low temperatures. When selecting
Specification recommended engine oil or an oil of the appropriate viscosity
equivalent can result in engine grade, always select an oil that
Use and ask for licensed engine oils
damage not covered by the meets the dexos1 specification or
with the dexos1™ approved
vehicle warranty. Check with your equivalent. See “Specification” for
certification mark. Engine oils
dealer or service provider on more information.
meeting the requirements for the
vehicle should have the dexos1 whether the oil is approved to the Engine Oil Additives/Engine
approved certification mark. This dexos1 specification. Oil Flushes
certification mark indicates that the Viscosity Grade
oil has been approved to the dexos1 Do not add anything to the oil. The
specification. SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscosity recommended oils with the dexos
grade for the vehicle. Do not use specification and displaying the
other viscosity grade oils such as dexos certification mark are all that
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50. is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-12 Vehicle Care
What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil system might indicate that an oil
elements that can be unhealthy for
This vehicle has a computer system change is not necessary for up to a
your skin and could even cause
that indicates when to change the year. The engine oil and filter must
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
engine oil and filter. This is based be changed at least once a year
your skin for very long. Clean your
on a combination of factors which and, at this time, the system must
skin and nails with soap and water,
include engine revolutions, engine be reset. Your dealer has trained
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
temperature, and miles driven. service people who will perform this
properly dispose of clothing or rags
Based on driving conditions, the work and reset the system. It is also
containing used engine oil. See the
mileage at which an oil change is important to check the oil regularly
manufacturer's warnings about the
indicated can vary considerably. over the course of an oil drain
use and disposal of oil products.
For the oil life system to work interval and keep it at the
Used oil can be a threat to the proper level.
properly, the system must be reset
environment. If you change your every time the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
When the system has calculated accidentally, the oil must be
from the filter before disposal. Never
that oil life has been diminished, changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
dispose of oil by putting it in the
it indicates that an oil change is since the last oil change.
trash or pouring it on the ground,
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Remember to reset the oil life
into sewers, or into streams or
OIL SOON DIC message or Code system whenever the oil
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
82 DIC message comes on. See is changed.
it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑30.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
Vehicle Care 10-13
How to Reset the Engine Oil vehicle is started, the engine oil life Change the fluid and filter at the
Life System system has not reset. Repeat the intervals listed in Maintenance
procedure. Schedule on page 11‑3, and be
Reset the system whenever the sure to use the fluid listed in
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
Automatic Transmission Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑13.
engine oil change. To reset the Fluid
system:
How to Check Automatic Manual Transmission
1. Using the DIC MENU button and Transmission Fluid Fluid
thumbwheel, scroll until you
reach REMAINING OIL LIFE on It is not necessary to check How to Check Manual
the DIC (oil can symbol with the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the Transmission Fluid
% sign for Canada).
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak It is not necessary to check the
2. Press the SET button to reset occurs, take the vehicle to your manual transmission fluid level.
the oil life at 100%. When dealer service department and have A transmission fluid leak is the only
prompted, use the thumbwheel it repaired as soon as possible. reason for fluid loss. If a leak
to highlight YES or NO. occurs, take the vehicle to your
Press the SET/CLEAR button The vehicle is not equipped with
a transmission fluid level dipstick. dealer service department and have
to confirm. it repaired as soon as possible.
There is a special procedure for
Be careful not to reset the oil life checking and changing the See Recommended Fluids and
display accidentally at any time transmission fluid. Because this Lubricants on page 11‑13 for the
other than after the oil is changed. procedure is difficult, this should proper fluid to use.
It cannot be reset accurately. be done at the dealer service
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON department. Contact the dealer for
DIC message or Code 82 DIC additional information.
message comes back on when the
10-14 Vehicle Care
Hydraulic Clutch How to Check and Add Fluid If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at
For vehicles with a manual Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
each engine oil change.
transmission, it is not necessary to reservoir to make sure the fluid level
regularly check brake/clutch fluid is at the MIN (minimum) line on the How to Inspect the Engine Air
unless there is a leak suspected. side of the reservoir. The brake/ Cleaner/Filter
Adding fluid will not correct a leak. hydraulic clutch fluid system should
be closed and sealed. To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
A fluid loss in this system could
remove the filter from the vehicle
indicate a problem. Have the Do not remove the cap to check the and lightly shake the filter to release
system inspected and repaired. fluid level or to top off the fluid level. loose dust and dirt. If the filter
When to Check and What Remove the cap only when remains covered with dirt, a new
necessary to add the proper fluid filter is required.
to Use until the level reaches the MIN line.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
Cleaner/Filter
reservoir cap has this symbol on it.
The common brake/clutch fluid Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake scheduled maintenance intervals
fluid as indicated on the reservoir and replace it at the first oil change
cap. See Engine Compartment after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
Overview on page 10‑6 for interval. See Maintenance Schedule
reservoir location. on page 11‑3 for more information.
Vehicle Care 10-15
To inspect or replace the engine air 1.8L L4 Engine

cleaner/filter: { WARNING
1.4L L4 Engine Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

off, dirt can easily get into the
1. Remove the six screws that engine, which could damage it.
secure the cover on. Always have the air cleaner/filter
2. Lift off the cover. in place when you are driving.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly.
5. Install the cover by lowering it
over the filter and secure with
the six screws.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Cooling System corrosion. In addition, the engine

{ WARNING coolant could require changing
The cooling system allows the sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan or 24 months, whichever occurs
working temperature. under the hood can start up even first. Any repairs would not be
when the engine is not running covered by the vehicle warranty.
and can cause injury. Keep Always use DEX-COOL
hands, clothing, and tools away (silicate-free) coolant in the
from any underhood electric fan. vehicle.
Engine Coolant
{ WARNING The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL engine
Heater and radiator hoses, and coolant. This coolant is designed to
other engine parts, can be very remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
you can be burned. occurs first.
1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4
Engine Similar Do not run the engine if there is a The following explains the cooling
leak. If you run the engine, it system and how to check and add
A. Engine Cooling Fan could lose all coolant. That could coolant when it is low. If there is a
(Out of View) cause an engine fire, and you problem with engine overheating,
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and could be burned. Get any leak see Engine Overheating on
Pressure Cap fixed before you drive the vehicle. page 10‑19.
Notice: Using coolant other than

DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
Vehicle Care 10-17
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Never dispose of engine coolant by
drinkable water and DEX-COOL putting it in the trash, pouring it on
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: changed by an authorized service
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down center, familiar with legal
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside requirements regarding used
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. coolant disposal. This will help
the proper coolant mixture will. protect the environment and
. Gives boiling protection up to your health.
The coolant warning system is 129°C (265°F), engine
set for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Checking Coolant
With plain water or the wrong
. Protects against rust and The vehicle must be on a level
mixture, the engine could get too
corrosion. surface when checking the
hot but you would not get the
coolant level.
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
could catch fire and you or Check to see if coolant is visible in
. Helps keep the proper engine the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable inside the coolant surge tank is
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant boiling, do not do anything else until
mixture is used, the engine could it cools down. If coolant is visible
overheat and be badly damaged. but the coolant level is not at the
The repair cost would not be indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture
covered by the vehicle warranty. of clean, drinkable water and
Too much water in the mixture DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant
can freeze and crack the engine, surge tank, but be sure the cooling
radiator, heater core, and system is cool before this is done.
other parts. See Engine Overheating on
10-18 Vehicle Care
The coolant surge tank is located in

the engine compartment on the { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
driver side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on Steam and scalding liquids from a The coolant warning system is
page 10‑6 for more information on hot cooling system can blow out set for the proper coolant mixture.
location. and burn you badly. They are With plain water or the wrong
under pressure, and if you turn mixture, the engine could get too
How to Add Coolant to the the coolant surge tank pressure hot but you would not get the
Coolant Surge Tank cap — even a little — they can overheat warning. The engine
Notice: This vehicle has a come out at high speed. Never could catch fire and you or
specific coolant fill procedure. turn the cap when the cooling others could be burned. Use a
Failure to follow this procedure system, including the coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
could cause the engine to surge tank pressure cap, is hot. water and DEX-COOL coolant.
overheat and be severely Wait for the cooling system and
damaged. coolant surge tank pressure cap Notice: In cold weather, water
If no problem is found, check to see to cool if you ever have to turn can freeze and crack the engine,
if coolant is visible in the coolant the pressure cap. radiator, heater core and other
surge tank. If coolant is visible but parts. Use the recommended
the coolant level is not at the coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
indicated level mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
{ WARNING
water and DEX-COOL coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure
Adding only plain water or some { WARNING
other liquid to the cooling system
the cooling system, including the can be dangerous. Plain water You can be burned if you spill
coolant surge tank pressure cap, and other liquids, can boil before coolant on hot engine parts.
is cool before you do it. the proper coolant mixture will. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
(Continued) (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-19
Turn the pressure cap slowly 5. Replace the pressure cap.

WARNING (Continued) counterclockwise about Be sure the pressure cap is
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear hand-tight.
and it will burn if the engine parts a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
are hot enough. Do not spill Check the level in the coolant surge
will allow any pressure still left to tank when the cooling system has
coolant on a hot engine. be vented out the cooled down. If the coolant is not at
discharge hose. the proper level, repeat Steps 1
2. Keep turning the pressure cap through 3 and reinstall the pressure
slowly and remove it. cap. If the coolant still is not at the
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with proper level when the system cools
the proper DEX-COOL coolant down again, see your dealer.
mixture to the indicated
level mark. Engine Overheating
4. With the coolant surge tank The vehicle has several indicators
pressure cap off, start the to warn of engine overheating.
engine and let it run until the There is an engine coolant
upper radiator hose can be felt temperature gauge on the vehicle
getting hot. Watch out for the instrument panel cluster. See
1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4 engine cooling fan. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Engine Similar By this time, the coolant level on page 5‑10.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank inside the coolant surge tank If the decision is made not to lift the
pressure cap when the cooling may be lower. If the level is hood when this warning appears,
system, including the coolant lower, add more of the proper get service help right away. See
surge tank pressure cap and DEX-COOL coolant mixture to Roadside Assistance Program on
upper radiator hose, is no the coolant surge tank until the page 13‑6.
longer hot. level reaches the indicated
level mark.
10-20 Vehicle Care
If the decision is made to lift the If Steam Is Coming from the If No Steam Is Coming from
hood, make sure the vehicle is Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment
parked on a level surface.
If an engine overheat warning is
Check to see if the engine cooling { WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen
fan is running. If the engine is or heard, the problem may not be
overheating, the fan should be Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
running. If it is not, do not continue can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the
to run the engine and have the just open the hood. Stay away vehicle:
vehicle serviced. from the engine if you see or hear .
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving.
coolant is not covered by the the vehicle until it cools down. . Idles for long periods in traffic.
warranty. Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you
. Tows a trailer.
open the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air off.
in it can catch fire. You or others 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
could be badly burned. Stop the temperature and to the highest
engine if it overheats, and get out fan speed. Open the windows
of the vehicle until the engine as necessary.
is cool.
Vehicle Care 10-21
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine Overheated Engine Notice: After driving in the
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. overheated engine protection
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
Protection operating mode, to avoid engine
road, shift to P (Park) or Operating Mode damage, allow the engine to cool
N (Neutral) and let the This emergency operating mode before attempting any repair.
engine idle. allows the vehicle to be driven to a The engine oil will be severely
If the temperature overheat gauge safe place in an emergency degraded. Repair the cause of
is no longer in the overheat zone or situation. If an overheated engine coolant loss, change the oil and
an overheat warning no longer condition exists, an overheat reset the oil life system. See
displays, the vehicle can be driven. protection mode which alternates Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly firing groups of cylinders helps
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe prevent engine damage. In this
vehicle distance from the vehicle in mode, a significant loss in power
front. If the warning does not come and engine performance will be
back on, continue to drive normally. noticed. The temperature gauge
will indicate an overheat condition
If the warning continues, pull over,
exists. Driving extended km (mi)
stop, and park the vehicle
and/or towing a trailer in the
right away.
overheat protection mode should
If there is no sign of steam, idle the be avoided.
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
following.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Washer Fluid Notice Brakes

. When using concentrated This vehicle has front disc brakes
What to Use washer fluid, follow the and could have rear drum brakes or
When windshield washer fluid is manufacturer's instructions rear disc brakes.
needed, be sure to read the for adding water.
manufacturer's instructions before Disc brake pads have built-in wear
. Do not mix water with indicators that make a high-pitched
use. If operating the vehicle in an
ready-to-use washer fluid. warning sound when the brake pads
area where the temperature may fall
Water can cause the solution are worn and new pads are needed.
below freezing, use a fluid that has to freeze and damage the
sufficient protection against The sound can come and go or be
washer fluid tank and other heard all the time the vehicle is
freezing.
parts of the washer system. moving, except when applying the
Adding Washer Fluid Also, water does not clean as brake pedal firmly.
well as washer fluid.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
{ WARNING
very cold. This allows for The brake wear warning sound
fluid expansion if freezing means that soon the brakes will
occurs, which could damage not work well. That could lead to
the tank if it is a crash. When the brake wear
Open the cap with the washer completely full. warning sound is heard, have the
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Do not use engine coolant vehicle serviced.
the tank is full. See Engine (antifreeze) in the windshield
Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. Notice: Continuing to drive with
windshield washer system worn-out brake pads could result
and paint. in costly brake repair.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Some driving conditions or climates Brake linings should always be For example, installing disc brake
can cause a brake squeal when the replaced as complete axle sets. pads that are wrong for the vehicle,
brakes are first applied or lightly can change the balance between
applied. This does not mean Brake Pedal Travel the front and rear brakes — for the
something is wrong with the brakes. See your dealer if the brake pedal worse. The braking performance
Properly torqued wheel nuts are does not return to normal height, expected can change in many other
necessary to help prevent brake or if there is a rapid increase in ways if the wrong replacement
pulsation. When tires are rotated, pedal travel. This could be a sign brake parts are installed.
inspect brake pads for wear and that brake service might be
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the required. Brake Fluid
proper sequence to torque Brake Adjustment
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2. Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, the brakes adjust for wear.
they do not have wear indicators,
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is Replacing Brake System Parts
heard, have the rear brake linings The braking system on a vehicle is
inspected immediately. Rear brake The brake/clutch master cylinder
complex. Its many parts have to be reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
drums should be removed and of top quality and work well together
inspected each time the tires are fluid as indicated on the reservoir
if the vehicle is to have really good cap. See Engine Compartment
removed for rotation or changing. braking. The vehicle was designed
Drum brakes have an inspection Overview on page 10‑6 for the
and tested with top-quality brake location of the reservoir.
hole to inspect lining wear during parts. When parts of the braking
scheduled maintenance. When the system are replaced, be sure to get
front brake pads are replaced, have new, approved replacement parts.
the rear brakes inspected, too. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly.
10-24 Vehicle Care
There are only two reasons why the When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING low level, the brake warning light
might go down: comes on. See Brake System
If too much brake fluid is added, it Warning Light on page 5‑16.
. The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn,
because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You What to Add
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and
installed, the fluid level goes Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
the vehicle could be damaged. from a sealed container. See
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is Recommended Fluids and
. A fluid leak in the brake/clutch done on the brake/clutch Lubricants on page 11‑13.
hydraulic system can also cause hydraulic system.
a low fluid level. Have the brake/ Always clean the brake/clutch fluid
clutch hydraulic system fixed, reservoir cap and the area around
since a leak means that sooner Checking Brake Fluid the cap before removing it. This
or later the brakes will not helps keep dirt from entering the
The brake/clutch fluid can be reservoir.
work well. checked without taking off the cap
by looking at the brake/clutch fluid
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. reservoir. { WARNING
If fluid is added when the linings are The fluid level should be above With the wrong kind of fluid in the
worn, there will be too much fluid MIN. If it is not, have the brake/ brake/clutch hydraulic system, the
when new brake linings are clutch hydraulic system checked to brakes might not work well. This
installed. Add or remove fluid, as see if there is a leak. could cause a crash. Always use
necessary, only when work is done the proper brake/clutch fluid.
on the brake/clutch hydraulic After work is done on the brake/
system. clutch hydraulic system, make sure
the level is above MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Notice Battery Vehicle Storage

. Using the wrong fluid can Refer to the replacement number on
badly damage brake/clutch the original battery label when a { WARNING
hydraulic system parts. For new battery is needed.
example, just a few drops of Batteries have acid that can burn
mineral-based oil, such as you and gas that can explode.
engine oil, in the brake { WARNING You can be badly hurt if you are
hydraulic system can not careful. See Jump Starting on
Battery posts, terminals, and
damage brake hydraulic page 10‑80 for tips on working
related accessories contain lead
system parts so badly that around a battery without
and lead compounds, chemicals
they will have to be replaced. getting hurt.
known to the State of California to
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid. cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling. Infrequent Usage: Remove the
. If brake fluid is spilled on black, negative (−) cable from the
the vehicle's painted battery to keep the battery from
surfaces, the paint finish can running down.
be damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the Extended Storage: Remove the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off black, negative (−) cable from the
immediately. battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Starter Switch Check 3. For automatic transmission Automatic Transmission

vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle should
Shift Lock Control
{ WARNING start only in P (Park) or Function Check
When you are doing this N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
inspection, the vehicle could
in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
move suddenly. If the vehicle
For manual transmission When you are doing this
moves, you or others could
vehicles, put the shift lever in inspection, the vehicle could
be injured.
Neutral, push the clutch pedal move suddenly. If the vehicle
down halfway, and try to start moves, you or others could
1. Before starting this check, be the engine. The vehicle should be injured.
sure there is enough room start only when the clutch pedal
around the vehicle. is pushed down all the way to 1. Before starting this check, be
2. Firmly apply both the parking the floor. If the vehicle starts sure there is enough room
brake and the regular brake. when the clutch pedal is not around the vehicle. It should be
See Parking Brake on pushed all the way down, parked on a level surface.
page 9‑36. contact your dealer for service.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
Vehicle Care 10-27
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. shift lever is in P (Park). The Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
See Parking Brake on ignition key should come out vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
page 9‑36. only in LOCK/OFF. your foot on the regular brake, set
Be ready to apply the regular . For manual transmission the parking brake.
brake immediately if the vehicle vehicles, the ignition key should . To check the parking brake's
begins to move. come out only in LOCK/OFF. holding ability: With the engine
3. With the engine off, turn the Contact your dealer if service is running and the transmission in
ignition on, but do not start the required. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
engine. Without applying the pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
regular brake, try to move the Park Brake and P (Park) held by the parking brake only.
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
Mechanism Check . To check the P (Park)
moves out of P (Park), contact mechanism's holding ability:
your dealer for service. { WARNING With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
When you are doing this check,
Ignition Transmission the vehicle could begin to move.
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Lock Check You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged. Contact your dealer if service is
While parked, and with the parking
Make sure there is room in front required.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever of the vehicle in case it begins to
position. roll. Be ready to apply the regular
. For automatic transmission brake at once should the vehicle
vehicles, the ignition should turn begin to move.
to LOCK/OFF only when the
10-28 Vehicle Care
Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the windshield wiper 4. Remove the wiper blade.
blade: Allowing the wiper blade arm to
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking. 1. Pull the wiper assembly away touch the windshield when no
See Maintenance Schedule on from the windshield. wiper blade is installed could
page 11‑3 for more information. damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
Replacement blades come in be covered by the vehicle
different types and are removed warranty. Do not allow the wiper
in different ways. For proper blade to touch the windshield.
windshield wiper blade length
and type, see Maintenance 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 for
Replacement Parts on page 11‑15. wiper blade replacement.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not 2. Lift up on the plastic latch in the
allow the wiper blade arm to middle of the wiper blade where
touch the windshield. the wiper arm attaches.
3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement High‐Beam Headlamp/

Low‐Beam Headlamp and DRL
Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement
the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
further adjustment. page 10‑34. page 10‑4.
However, if the vehicle is damaged For any bulb‐changing procedure
in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact
be affected. Aim adjustment to the your dealer.
low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash Headlamps, Front Turn
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
Signal and Parking
Lamps
If the headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommended that
the vehicle be taken to a dealer
for service.
2. Remove the connector

retaining tab (A).
3. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector from the bulb (C) by
pressing the connector
release (B) and pulling
straight back.
A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
B. High‐Beam Headlamp/
Low‐Beam Headlamp and DRL
10-30 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the bulb (C) from the Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

headlamp assembly by turning
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
counterclockwise and pulling
page 10‑4.
straight back.
5. Install the new bulb in the
headlamp assembly by turning
clockwise.
6. Install the wiring harness
connector to the bulb. Be sure
the connector release (B) locks
into place.
7. Install the connector 3. Remove the bulb (A) from the
retaining tab (A). bulb socket.
4. Install the new bulb in the
bulb socket.
2. Remove the parking/turn signal 5. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp bulb socket from the headlamp assembly by turning
headlamp assembly by turning clockwise.
counterclockwise.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
2. Remove the trunk deck trim 4. Remove the bulb from the
cover (A). socket (A).
3. Remove the bulb socket (B) by 5. Install the new bulb in the
turning counterclockwise and bulb socket.
Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamps pulling straight out. 6. Install the bulb socket by turning
1. Open the trunk. clockwise.
7. Install the trunk deck trim cover.
10-32 Vehicle Care
To replace any one of these bulbs:

Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal,
Back‐up, and Rear
Sidemarker Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
A. Back-up Lamp 3. Remove the two screws, that

B. Stoplamp/Taillamp secure the taillamp assembly.
C. Turn Signal Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
2. Open the two screw covers.

Vehicle Care 10-33
5. Remove the bulb socket from

the taillamp assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
6. Install a new bulb into the
bulb socket.
7. Install the bulb socket into the
taillamp assembly by turning
it clockwise.
8. Install the taillamp assembly and
tighten the two screws.
9. Close the two screw covers.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly A. Sidemarker Lamp
by pulling it straight back until B. Turn Signal Lamp
the two posts disengage from
the grommets. C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
D. Back-up Lamp
10-34 Vehicle Care
License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs

To replace the license plate Bulb
lamp bulb: Exterior Lamp
Number
Back-Up Lamp 921K
Front and Rear
194
Sidemarker Lamp
Front Parking/Turn
7444NA
Signal Lamp
High Beam/Low
Beam and DRL H13LL
2. Turn and pull the license plate Headlamp
lamp assembly down.
Rear Turn
3. Turn the bulb socket 7443NA
Signal Lamp
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket. Stoplamp/Taillamp 3057K LCP
1. Remove the two screws from the
license plate lamp assembly. 4. Push the new bulb into the For replacement bulbs not listed
socket. here, contact your dealer.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning
clockwise into the license plate
lamp assembly.
6. Replace the license plate lamp
assembly by using the two
screws to secure.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by a
headlamp wiring checked right away
The vehicle has fuses and circuit combination of fuses and circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an breakers. This greatly reduces the
remain off.
electrical system overload. chance of damage caused by
Windshield Wipers electrical problems.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to To check a fuse, look at the
and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield silver-colored band inside the fuse.
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools If the band is broken or melted,
normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart. replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
greatly reduces the chance of circuit a bad fuse with a new one of the
Although the circuit is protected identical size and rating.
overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload
electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may Fuses of the same amperage
Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage. can be temporarily borrowed from
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow another fuse location, if a fuse
from the windshield before using the goes out. Replace the fuse as
Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers. soon as possible.
of the identical size and rating.
If the overload is caused by an To identify and check fuses, circuit
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or breakers, and relays, see Engine
a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed. Compartment Fuse Block on
same amperage fuse can be page 10‑36 and Instrument Panel
borrowed. Choose some feature of Fuse Block on page 10‑40.
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover,

squeeze the clips and swing it up. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the The vehicle may not be equipped Mini Fuses Usage
vehicle may damage it. Always with all of the fuses, relays, and
keep the covers on any electrical features shown. Transmission
1
component. Control Module
Engine Control
2
Module
3 Not Used
Vehicle Care 10-37
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Canister Vent 18 Fuel Control Module High Beam
4 37
Solenoid Right Side
19 Not Used
5 Ignition 38 High Beam Left Side
20 Fuel Pump
7 Not Used 39 Not Used
23 Not Used
8 Fuel Injection 40 Not Used
29 Not Used
Fuel Injection/ 46 Cooling Fan
9 Antilock Brake
Ignition System 30
System 47 Lambda Sensor
Engine Control
10 Body Control 48 Fog Lights
Module 31
Module
49 Not Used
11 Lambda Sensor
Body Control
32 50 Not Used
Canister Vent Module
13
Solenoid 51 Horn
33 Front Seat Heating
14 Not Used 52 Ignition
Sunroof
34
15 Rear Wiper (If Equipped) Automatic Dimming
53
Rearview Mirror
Ignition/Air Quality Infotainment
16 35
Sensor/Aero‐Shutter System/Amplifier Light Switch/
54
Light Control
17 Ignition/Airbag 36 Not Used
10-38 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage J‐Case Usage

Fuses
55 Mirror Folding Fuel System Control
67
Module 22 Not Used
56 Windshield Washer
68 Not Used Front Power
Steering 24
57 Windows
Column Lock Battery Voltage
69
Sensor Electronic
58 Not Used 25
Vacuum Pump
70 Not Used
60 Heated Mirror
Antilock Brake
71 Not Used 26
61 Heated Mirror System Pump
62 Air Conditioning J‐Case Usage Electronic Key
27
Rear Window Fuses System/PEPS
63
Sensor 6 Front Wipers Rear Window
28
64 Air Quality Sensor Defogger
12 Starter Solenoid
41 Not Used
65 Rear Fog Lamp Rear Power
21 42 Cooling Fan K2
66 Rear Washer Windows
Vehicle Care 10-39
J‐Case Usage Micro Usage HC Relays Usage

Fuses Relays
9 Cooling Fan K2
43 Not Used 5 Front Wiper On
13 Cooling Fan K1
44 Not Used 6 Not Used
45 Cooling Fan K1 10 Cooling Fan K3 Mini Relays Usage
59 Not Used 12 Cooling Fan K3 7 Ignition 87 Main
14 Not Used 15 Ignition 15
Micro Usage
16 Not Used
Relays
U‐Micro Usage
17 Not Used
1 A/C Clutch Relays
2 Starter Solenoid 3 Cooling Fan K7
4 Front Wiper Speed 8 Fuel Pump
11 Not Used
10-40 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse Fuses Usage

Block Infotainment
1 System/Hands‐free
Phone
2 Not Used
Body Control
3
Module
4 Infotainment System
Information Display/
5
Parking Assist
6 Cigarette Lighter
7 Power Outlet
The instrument panel fuse block is Body Control
8
in the driver side of the instrument Module
panel. To access the fuses:
Body Control
1. Open the fuse block cover by 9
Module
pulling out at the top.
Body Control
2. Remove the lower edge of 10
Module
the cover.
3. Remove the cover. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
To reinstall the cover, reverse the The vehicle may not be equipped
steps above. with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

11 Interior Fan 20 Not Used 1 Trunk Open
12 Not Used 21 Instrument Cluster 2 Logistics Module
13 Power Seat Ignition/Electronic 3 RAP Relay
22
Key System
Diagnostic
14
Connector Body Control
23
Module
15 Airbag
Body Control
Central Locking 24
16 Module
System/Tailgate
Steering
Air Conditioning 25
17 Column Lock
System
26 Not Used
18 Not Used
19 Not Used
10-42 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and
See the warranty manual for maintain the recommended mount the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure. Winter Tires
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a Consider installing winter tires on
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly the vehicle if frequent driving on
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them. snow or ice covered roads is
cause overheating as a result expected. All season tires provide
. Replace any tires that have good overall performance on most
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a surfaces, but they may not offer
with potholes, curbs, etc. the traction or the same level of
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑10. (Continued) performance as winter tires on
snow or ice covered roads.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-43
Winter tires, in general, are Winter tires with the same speed Notice: Low‐profile tires are
designed for increased traction on rating as the original equipment tires more susceptible to damage
snow and ice covered roads. With may not be available for H, V, W, Y, from road hazards or curb
winter tires, there may be decreased and ZR speed rated tires. If winter impact than standard profile
dry road traction, increased road tires with a lower speed rating are
tires. Tire and/or wheel
noise, and shorter tread life. After chosen, never exceed the tire's
changing to winter tires, be alert for maximum speed capability. assembly damage can occur
changes in vehicle handling and when coming into contact
braking. Low-Profile Tires with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged
See your dealer for details If the vehicle has P225/45R18
regarding winter tire availability and
objects, or when sliding into a
size tires, they are classified as curb. The warranty does not
proper tire selection. Also, see
low‐profile tires. These tires are cover this type of damage.
Buying New Tires on page 10‑57.
designed for very responsive Keep tires set to the correct
If using snow tires: driving on wet or dry pavement, inflation pressure and, when
. Use tires of the same brand and however, may produce more possible, avoid contact with
tread type on all four wheel road noise and tend to curbs, potholes, and other
positions. wear faster. road hazards.
. Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
10-44 Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the Tire Identification Number (TIN).
“Tire Size” illustration later in this The TIN shows the
Useful information about a tire is section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code,
molded into its sidewall. The tire size, and date the tire was
examples show a typical (B) TPC Spec
(Tire Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is
passenger vehicle tire and a molded onto both sides of the
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may
GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture.
criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in
GM's TPC specifications meet or the sidewall and under the tread.
exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
(C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to
Transportation): The grade tires based on three
Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear,
(DOT) code indicates that the traction, and temperature
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example tire is in compliance with the resistance. For more information
U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 10‑59.
combination of letters and Safety Standards.
numbers used to define a (G) Maximum Cold Inflation
particular tire's width, height, (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that
aspect ratio, construction type, (TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to
of Transportation) code are the support that load.
Vehicle Care 10-45
compact spare tire, see For more information on tire

Compact Spare Tire on pressure and inflation see Tire
page 10‑80 and If a Tire Goes Pressure on page 10‑49.
Flat on page 10‑63. (F) Tire Size: A combination of
(C) Tire Identification Number letters and numbers define a
(TIN): The letters and numbers tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
following the DOT (Department construction type, and service
of Transportation) code are the description. The letter T as the
Tire Identification Number (TIN). first character in the tire size
The TIN shows the means the tire is for temporary
manufacturer and plant code, use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example tire size, and date the tire was (G) TPC Spec (Tire
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type manufactured. The TIN is Performance Criteria
of cord and number of plies in molded onto both sides of the Specification): Original
the sidewall and under the tread. tire, although only one side may equipment tires designed to
have the date of manufacture. GM's specific tire performance
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or (D) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification
temporary use tire has a tread Load Limit: Maximum load code molded onto the sidewall.
life of approximately 5 000 km that can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or
(3,000 mi) and should not be maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety
driven at speeds over 105 km/h support that load. guidelines.
(65 mph). The compact spare (E) Tire Inflation:
tire is for emergency use when a The temporary use tire or
regular road tire has lost air and compact spare tire should be
gone flat. If the vehicle has a inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
10-46 Vehicle Care
Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
The following is an example of a For example, if the tire size
typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
tire size. item C of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
(D) Construction Code: A outward on each square inch of
letter code is used to indicate the tire. Air pressure is
the type of ply construction in expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
the tire. The letter R means or psi (pounds per square inch).
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias Accessory Weight: The
The United States version of a combined weight of optional
metric tire sizing system. The ply construction; and the letter B
means belted‐bias ply accessories. Some examples of
letter P as the first character in optional accessories are
the tire size means a passenger construction.
automatic transmission, power
vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of steering, power brakes, power
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air
and Rim Association. (F) Service Description: These conditioning.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width.
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
Vehicle Care 10-47
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
cords that is located between and coolant, but without Rating for the rear axle. See
the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo. Vehicle Load Limits on
may be made from steel or other DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑10.
reinforcing materials. into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in The side of an asymmetrical tire,
steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S. that must always face outward
cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation when mounted on a vehicle.
the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure.
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:
alternate angles less than A tire used on light duty trucks
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, and some multipurpose
the tread. passenger vehicles.
production plant, brand, and
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. Load Index: An assigned
amount of air pressure in a tire, number ranging from 1 to 279
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits that corresponds to the load
or psi (pounds per square inch) carrying capacity of a tire.
before a tire has built up heat on page 9‑10.
from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Maximum Inflation Pressure:
on page 10‑49. Weight Rating for the front axle. The maximum air pressure to
See Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and page 9‑10.
molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the
10-48 Vehicle Care
Maximum Load Rating: manufacturer, brand, and/or Rim: A metal support for a tire
The load rating for a tire at the model name molding that is and upon which the tire beads
maximum permissible inflation higher or deeper than the same are seated.
pressure for that tire. moldings on the other sidewall Sidewall: The portion of a tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle of the tire. between the tread and the bead.
Weight: The sum of curb Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Speed Rating:
weight, accessory weight, A tire used on passenger cars An alphanumeric code assigned
vehicle capacity weight, and and some light duty trucks and to a tire indicating the maximum
production options weight. multipurpose vehicles. speed at which a tire can
Normal Occupant Weight: Recommended Inflation operate.
The number of occupants a Pressure: Vehicle Traction: The friction between
vehicle is designed to seat manufacturer's recommended the tire and the road surface.
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). tire inflation pressure as shown The amount of grip provided.
See Vehicle Load Limits on on the tire placard. See Tire
page 9‑10. Pressure on page 10‑49 Tread: The portion of a tire that
andVehicle Load Limits on comes into contact with
Occupant Distribution : the road.
Designated seating positions. page 9‑10.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators:
Outward Facing Sidewall: Narrow bands, sometimes called
The side of an asymmetrical tire tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at wear bars, that show across
that has a particular side that the tread of a tire when only
faces outward when mounted on 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread. 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread
a vehicle. The side of the tire remains. See When It Is Time
that contains a whitewall, bears for New Tires on page 10‑57.
white lettering, or bears
Vehicle Care 10-49
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label . Premature or

Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a irregular wear.
information system that provides vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling.
consumers with ratings for a capacity weight and the original
tire's traction, temperature, equipment tire size and
. Reduced fuel economy.
and treadwear. Ratings are recommended inflation pressure. Overinflated tires, or tires that
determined by tire See “Tire and Loading have too much air, can
manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle result in:
government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑10. . Unusual wear.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure . Poor handling.
Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount of
. Rough ride.
page 10‑59. air pressure to operate . Needless damage from
Vehicle Capacity Weight: effectively. road hazards.
The number of designated Notice: Neither tire
seating positions multiplied by The Tire and Loading
underinflation nor Information label on the vehicle
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated overinflation is good. indicates the original equipment
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires
Limits on page 9‑10. tires and the correct cold tire
that do not have enough air, inflation pressures. The
Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in: recommended pressure is the
Tire: Load on an individual tire . Tire overloading and minimum air pressure needed to
due to curb weight, accessory overheating which could support the vehicle's maximum
weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout. load carrying capacity.
cargo weight.
10-50 Vehicle Care
For additional information How to Check Re‐check the tire pressure with
regarding how much weight the Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge.
vehicle can carry, and an gauge to check tire pressure. Return the valve caps on the
example of the Tire and Loading Proper tire inflation cannot be valve stems to prevent leaks
Information label, see Vehicle determined by looking at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
Load Limits on page 9‑10. How Check the tire inflation pressure
the vehicle is loaded affects when the tires are cold, meaning Tire Pressure Monitor
vehicle handling and ride the vehicle has not been driven
comfort. Never load the vehicle System
for at least three hours or no
with more weight than it was The Tire Pressure Monitor System
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the technology to check tire pressure
When to Check tire valve stem. Press the tire levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
Check the tires once a month or gauge firmly onto the valve to the air pressure in your tires and
get a pressure measurement. transmit tire pressure readings to a
more. Do not forget the compact
If the cold tire inflation pressure receiver located in the vehicle.
spare tire, if the vehicle has one.
The compact spare should be at matches the recommended Each tire, including the spare
420 kPa (60 psi). For additional pressure on the Tire and (if provided), should be checked
Loading Information label, no monthly when cold and inflated to
information regarding the
further adjustment is necessary. the inflation pressure recommended
compact spare tire, see by the vehicle manufacturer on the
Compact Spare Tire on If the inflation pressure is low, vehicle placard or tire inflation
page 10‑80. add air until the recommended pressure label. (If your vehicle has
pressure is reached. If the tires of a different size than the size
inflation pressure is high, press indicated on the vehicle placard or
on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve to release air.
Vehicle Care 10-51
tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is When the malfunction indicator is
should determine the proper tire not a substitute for proper tire illuminated, the system may not be
inflation pressure for those tires.) maintenance, and it is the driver's able to detect or signal low tire
As an added safety feature, your responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure as intended. TPMS
vehicle has been equipped with a pressure, even if under‐inflation has malfunctions may occur for a variety
tire pressure monitoring system not reached the level to trigger of reasons, including the installation
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire illumination of the TPMS low tire of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure telltale when one or pressure telltale. wheels on the vehicle that prevent
more of your tires is significantly Your vehicle has also been the TPMS from functioning properly.
under‐inflated. equipped with a TPMS malfunction Always check the TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the telltale after replacing one or more
Accordingly, when the low tire tires or wheels on your vehicle to
pressure telltale illuminates, you system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is ensure that the replacement or
should stop and check your tires as alternate tires and wheels allow the
soon as possible, and inflate them combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a TPMS to continue to function
to the proper pressure. Driving on a properly.
significantly under‐inflated tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
causes the tire to overheat and can approximately one minute and then See Tire Pressure Monitor
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation remain continuously illuminated. Operation on page 10‑52 for
also reduces fuel efficiency and This sequence will continue upon additional information.
tire tread life, and may affect subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
the vehicle's handling and long as the malfunction exists.
stopping ability.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Federal Communications details about the DIC operation and

Commission (FCC) Rules and displays see Driver Information
with Industry Canada Center (DIC) on page 5‑23.
Standards The low tire pressure warning light
See Radio Frequency Statement on may come on in cool weather when
page 13‑16 for information the vehicle is first started, and then
When a low tire pressure condition turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
is detected, the TPMS illuminates could be an early indicator that the
Communications Commission (FCC)
the low tire pressure warning light air pressure is getting low and must
Rules and with Industry Canada
located on the instrument cluster. be inflated to the proper pressure.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If the warning light comes on, stop
A Tire and Loading Information label
as soon as possible and inflate the
Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure
shows the size of the original
Operation equipment tires and the correct
shown on the Tire and Loading
inflation pressure for the tires when
Information label. See Vehicle Load
This vehicle may have a Tire they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑10.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Limits on page 9‑10, for an example
The TPMS is designed to warn the A message to check the pressure in of the Tire and Loading Information
driver when a low tire pressure a specific tire displays in the Driver label and its location. Also see Tire
condition exists. TPMS sensors are Information Center (DIC) display. Pressure on page 10‑49.
mounted onto each tire and wheel The low tire pressure warning light
The TPMS can warn about a low
assembly, excluding the spare tire and the DIC warning message come
tire pressure condition but it does
and wheel assembly. The TPMS on at each ignition cycle until the
not replace normal tire
sensors monitor the air pressure in tires are inflated to the correct
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
the tires and transmit the tire inflation pressure. Using the DIC,
on page 10‑55, Tire Rotation on
pressure readings to a receiver tire pressure levels can be viewed.
page 10‑55 and Tires on
located in the vehicle. For additional information and
page 10‑42.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Notice: Tire sealant materials are for the remainder of the ignition sensor matching process.
not all the same. A non-approved cycle. A DIC warning message also See "TPMS Sensor Matching
tire sealant could damage the displays. The malfunction light and Process" later in this section.
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor DIC warning message come on at . One or more TPMS sensors are
damage caused by using an each ignition cycle until the problem missing or damaged. The DIC
incorrect tire sealant is not is corrected. Some of the conditions message and the malfunction
covered by the vehicle warranty. that can cause these to come light should go off when the
Always use only the on are: TPMS sensors are installed and
GM-approved tire sealant . One of the road tires has been the sensor matching process is
available through your dealer or replaced with the spare tire. performed successfully. See
included in the vehicle. The spare tire does not have a your dealer for service.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits TPMS sensor. The malfunction . Replacement tires or wheels do
use a GM-approved liquid tire light and DIC message should not match the original equipment
sealant. Using non-approved tire go off after the road tire is tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
sealants could damage the TPMS replaced and the sensor other than those recommended
sensors. See Tire Sealant and matching process is performed could prevent the TPMS from
Compressor Kit on page 10‑65 for successfully. See "TPMS Sensor functioning properly. See Buying
information regarding the inflator kit Matching Process" later in this New Tires on page 10‑57.
materials and instructions. section.
. Operating electronic devices or
TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching being near facilities using radio
Message process was not done or wave frequencies similar to the
not completed successfully TPMS could cause the TPMS
The TPMS will not function properly after rotating the tires. The
if one or more of the TPMS sensors sensors to malfunction.
malfunction light and the DIC
are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning
system detects a malfunction, the successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
low tire warning light flashes for low tire condition.
about one minute and then stays on
10-54 Vehicle Care
See your dealer for service if the There are two minutes to match 6. Press the SET/CLR button again
TPMS malfunction light and DIC the first tire/wheel position, and to confirm the selection.
message come on and stay on. five minutes overall to match all The horn sounds twice to signal
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes the receiver is in relearn mode
TPMS Sensor Matching longer, the matching process stops
Process and the TIRE LEARNING
and must be restarted. ACTIVE message displays on
Each TPMS sensor has a unique The TPMS sensor matching the DIC screen.
identification code. The identification process is:
code needs to be matched to a new 7. Start with the driver side
tire/wheel position after rotating the 1. Set the parking brake. front tire.
tires or replacing one or more of the 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 8. Place the relearn tool against
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor the engine off. the tire sidewall, near the valve
matching process should also be stem. Then press the button to
3. Use the MENU button to select
performed after replacing a spare activate the TPMS sensor.
the Vehicle Information menu in
tire with a road tire containing the A horn chirp confirms that the
the Driver Information
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light sensor identification code has
Center (DIC).
and the DIC message should go off been matched to this tire and
at the next ignition cycle. The 4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to wheel position.
sensors are matched to the tire/ the Tire Pressure menu item
screen. 9. Proceed to the passenger side
wheel positions, using a TPMS
front tire, and repeat the
relearn tool, in the following order: 5. Press the SET/CLR button to procedure in Step 8.
driver side front tire, passenger side begin the sensor matching
front tire, passenger side rear tire, process. 10. Proceed to the passenger side
and driver side rear. See your rear tire, and repeat the
dealer for service or to purchase a A message requesting procedure in Step 8.
relearn tool. acceptance of the process
should display.
Vehicle Care 10-55
11. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection

. The tire has a puncture, cut,
tire, and repeat the procedure or other damage that cannot
in Step 8. The horn sounds We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of
two times to indicate the including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the
sensor identification code has vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
been matched to the driver for signs of wear or damage at
side rear tire, and the TPMS least once a month. Tire Rotation
sensor matching process is no
longer active. The TIRE Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
LEARNING ACTIVE message . The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
on the DIC display screen more places around the tire Maintenance Schedule on
goes off. page 11‑3.
can be seen.
12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Tires are rotated to achieve
. There is cord or fabric
13. Set all four tires to the showing through the tire's a uniform wear for all tires.
recommended air pressure rubber. The first rotation is the most
level as indicated on the Tire important.
and Loading Information label. . The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged Any time unusual wear is
deep enough to show cord or noticed, rotate the tires as soon
fabric. as possible and check the wheel
alignment. Also check for
. The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels.
or split.
10-56 Vehicle Care
See When It Is Time for New Adjust the front and rear tires to
Tires on page 10‑57 and Wheel the recommended inflation WARNING (Continued)
Replacement on page 10‑61. pressure on the Tire and The wheel could come off and
Loading Information label after cause an accident. When
the tires have been rotated. changing a wheel, remove any
See Tire Pressure on rust or dirt from places where the
page 10‑49 and Vehicle Load wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
Limits on page 9‑10. an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor towel can be used; however, use
System. See Tire Pressure a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑52.
Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are
wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel
grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities
Use this rotation pattern when tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on
rotating the tires. or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12‑2.
grease on the flat wheel
Do not include the compact
mounting surface or on the
spare tire in the tire rotation. { WARNING wheel nuts or bolts.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-57
When It Is Time for New The rubber in tires ages over time. at least a month, remove the tires or
This also applies for the spare tire, raise the vehicle to reduce the
Tires if the vehicle has one, even if it is weight from the tires.
Factors such as maintenance, never used. Multiple conditions
temperatures, driving speeds, including temperatures, loading Buying New Tires
vehicle loading, and road conditions conditions, and inflation pressure
affect the wear rate of the tires. maintenance affect how fast aging GM has developed and matched
takes place. Tires will typically need specific tires for the vehicle. The
to be replaced due to wear before original equipment tires installed
they may need to be replaced were designed to meet General
due to age. Consult the tire Motors Tire Performance Criteria
manufacturer for more information Specification (TPC Spec)
on when tires should be replaced. system rating. When
Vehicle Storage replacement tires are needed,
GM strongly recommends
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
buying tires with the same
a vehicle that will be stored for at TPC Spec rating.
least a month in a cool, dry, clean GM's exclusive TPC Spec
area away from direct sunlight to system considers over a dozen
slow aging. This area should be critical specifications that impact
Treadwear indicators are one way to free of grease, gasoline, or other
tell when it is time for new tires. the overall performance of the
substances that can deteriorate
Treadwear indicators appear when rubber.
vehicle, including brake system
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) performance, ride and handling,
or less of tread remaining. See Tire Parking for an extended period can traction control, and tire
Inspection on page 10‑55 and Tire cause flat spots on the tires that pressure monitoring
Rotation on page 10‑55 for more may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
performance.
information.
10-58 Vehicle Care
GM's TPC Spec number is

molded onto the tire's sidewall { WARNING { WARNING
near the tire size. If the tires Tires could explode during Using bias-ply tires on the
have an all‐season tread design, improper service. Attempting to vehicle may cause the wheel
the TPC Spec number will be mount or dismount a tire could rim flanges to develop cracks
followed by MS for mud and cause injury or death. Only your after many miles of driving.
snow. See Tire Sidewall dealer or authorized tire service A tire and/or wheel could fail
Labeling on page 10‑44 for center should mount or dismount suddenly and cause a crash.
additional information. the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with
GM recommends replacing all the wheels on the vehicle.
the tires at the same time.
Uniform tread depth on all tires { WARNING If the vehicle tires must be
will help to maintain the replaced with a tire that does not
performance of the vehicle. Mixing tires of different sizes,
have a TPC Spec number, make
Braking and handling brands, or types may cause
sure they are the same size,
performance may be adversely loss of control of the vehicle,
load range, speed rating, and
affected if all the tires are not resulting in a crash or other
construction (radial) as the
replaced at the same time. See vehicle damage. Use the
original tires.
Tire Inspection on page 10‑55 correct size, brand, and type
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑55 of tires on all wheels. Vehicles that have a tire
for information on proper tire pressure monitoring system
rotation. could give an inaccurate low‐
pressure warning if non‐TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑50.
Vehicle Care 10-59
The Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality

Information label indicates the { WARNING Grading
original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
on page 9‑10 for the label level of performance and safety
where applicable on the tire
location and more information if tires not recommended for sidewall between tread shoulder
about the Tire and Loading those wheels are selected. This and maximum section width.
Information label. increases the chance of a crash For example:
and serious injury. Only use Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Different Size Tires and GM specific wheel and tire Temperature A
Wheels systems developed for the
vehicle, and have them properly The following information relates
If wheels or tires are installed that installed by a GM certified to the system developed by the
are a different size than the original technician. United States National Highway
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle Traffic Safety Administration
performance, including its braking,
See Buying New Tires on (NHTSA), which grades tires
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover page 10‑57 and Accessories and by treadwear, traction, and
may be affected. If the vehicle has Modifications on page 10‑3 for temperature performance. This
electronic systems such as antilock additional information. applies only to vehicles sold in
brakes, rollover airbags, traction the United States. The grades
control, and electronic stability are molded on the sidewalls of
control, the performance of these most passenger car tires.
systems can also be affected.
10-60 Vehicle Care
The Uniform Tire Quality Treadwear controlled conditions on

Grading (UTQG) system does The treadwear grade is a specified government test
not apply to deep tread, comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and
winter-type snow tires, wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may
space-saver, or temporary use under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance.
spare tires, tires with nominal specified government test Warning: The traction grade
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on
(25 to 30 cm), or to some graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
limited-production tires. a half (1½) times as well on the tests, and does not include
While the tires available on government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
General Motors passenger cars graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
and light trucks may vary with performance of tires depends characteristics.
respect to these grades, they upon the actual conditions of Temperature – A, B, C
must also conform to federal their use, however, and may
The temperature grades are
safety requirements and depart significantly from the
A (the highest), B, and C,
additional General Motors Tire norm due to variations in driving
representing the tire's resistance
Performance Criteria (TPC) habits, service practices and
to the generation of heat and its
standards. differences in road
ability to dissipate heat when
All Passenger Car Tires Must characteristics and climate.
tested under controlled
Conform to Federal Safety Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
Requirements In Addition To laboratory test wheel. Sustained
The traction grades, from
These Grades. high temperature can cause the
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
Vehicle Care 10-61
to sudden tire failure. The grade Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement
C corresponds to a level of Balance Replace any wheel that is bent,
performance which all cracked, or badly rusted or
passenger car tires must meet The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
under the Federal Motor Safety loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
provide the longest tire life and best
Standard No. 109. Grades B and overall performance. Adjustments to wheel nuts should be replaced.
A represent higher levels of wheel alignment and tire balancing If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
performance on the laboratory will not be necessary on a regular Some aluminum wheels can be
test wheel than the minimum basis. However, check the repaired. See your dealer if any of
required by law. Warning: The alignment if there is unusual tire these conditions exist.
temperature grade for this tire is wear or if the vehicle is pulling to Your dealer will know the kind of
established for a tire that is one side or the other. If the vehicle wheel that is needed.
properly inflated and not vibrates when driving on a smooth
Each new wheel should have the
overloaded. Excessive speed, road, the tires and wheels might
same load-carrying capacity,
underinflation, or excessive need to be rebalanced. See your
diameter, width, offset, and be
dealer for proper diagnosis.
loading, either separately or in mounted the same way as the one it
combination, can cause heat replaces.
buildup and possible tire failure.
10-62 Vehicle Care
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel headlamp aim, bumper height, Tire Chains
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor vehicle ground clearance, and tire
System (TPMS) sensors with new or tire chain clearance to the
GM original equipment parts. body and chassis. { WARNING
See If a Tire Goes Flat on Do not use tire chains. There is
{ WARNING page 10‑63 for more information. not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
Using the wrong replacement Used Replacement Wheels proper amount of clearance can
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel cause damage to the brakes,
nuts can be dangerous. It could { WARNING suspension, or other vehicle
affect the braking and handling of parts. The area damaged by the
the vehicle. Tires can lose air, Replacing a wheel with a used
tire chains could cause loss of
and cause loss of control, causing one is dangerous. How it has
control and a crash. Use another
a crash. Always use the correct been used or how far it has been
type of traction device only if its
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel driven may be unknown. It could
manufacturer recommends it for
nuts for replacement. fail suddenly and cause a crash.
the vehicle's tire size combination
When replacing wheels, use a
and road conditions. Follow that
new GM original equipment
Notice: The wrong wheel can manufacturer's instructions.
wheel.
also cause problems with bearing To avoid vehicle damage, drive
life, brake cooling, speedometer slowly and readjust or remove the
or odometer calibration, traction device if it contacts the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install
them on the rear tires.
Vehicle Care 10-63
If a Tire Goes Flat It may be very bumpy and noisy.

Gently brake to a stop, well off the { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout road, if possible.
while driving, especially if the tires Lifting a vehicle and getting
are maintained properly. If air goes under it to do maintenance or
out of a tire, it is much more likely to { WARNING repairs is dangerous without the
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a Driving on a flat tire will cause appropriate safety equipment and
blowout, here are a few tips about permanent damage to the tire. training. If a jack is provided with
what to expect and what to do: the vehicle, it is designed only for
Re-inflating a tire after it has
If a front tire fails, the flat tire been driven on while severely changing a flat tire. If it is used for
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle underinflated or flat may cause a anything else, you or others could
toward that side. Take your foot off blowout and a serious crash. be badly injured or killed if the
the accelerator pedal and grip the Never attempt to re-inflate a tire vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
steering wheel firmly. Steer to that has been driven on while is provided with the vehicle, only
maintain lane position, and then severely underinflated or flat. use it for changing a flat tire.
gently brake to a stop, well off the Have your dealer or an authorized
road, if possible. tire service center repair or If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
A rear blowout, particularly on a replace the flat tire as soon and wheel damage by driving slowly
curve, acts much like a skid and as possible. to a level place, well off the road,
may require the same correction as if possible. Turn on the hazard
used in a skid. Stop pressing the warning flashers. See Hazard
accelerator pedal and steer to Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
straighten the vehicle.
10-64 Vehicle Care
This vehicle may come with a jack, When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
{ WARNING spare tire, and wheel block(s) or a use the following example as a
tire sealant and compressor kit. guide to assist in the placement of
Changing a tire can be To use the jacking equipment to the wheel blocks (A).
dangerous. The vehicle can slip change a spare tire safely, follow
off the jack and roll over or fall the instructions below. Then see
causing injury or death. Find a Tire Changing on page 10‑72. To
level place to change the tire. use the tire sealant and compressor
To help prevent the vehicle kit, see Tire Sealant and
from moving: Compressor Kit on page 10‑65.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or
a manual transmission in A. Wheel Block
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
B. Flat Tire
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle The following information explains
is raised. how to repair or change a tire.
4. Do not allow passengers to

remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire To use the wheel blocks, lift the
being changed. wheel block and lock it into place.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Tire Sealant and If this vehicle has a tire sealant and

Compressor Kit
{ WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
Overinflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not
{ WARNING the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
be a place to store a tire.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed to read and follow the tire sealant The tire sealant and compressor
area with poor ventilation is and compressor kit instructions can be used to temporarily seal
dangerous. Engine exhaust may and inflate the tire to its punctures up to 6 mm (¼ inch) in
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust the tread area of the tire. It can also
recommended pressure. Do not
be used to inflate an under
contains carbon monoxide (CO) exceed the recommended
inflated tire.
which cannot be seen or smelled. pressure.
It can cause unconsciousness If the tire has been separated from
and even death. Never run the the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
engine in an enclosed area that or has a large puncture, the tire is
has no fresh air ventilation. For { WARNING too severely damaged for the tire
more information, see Engine sealant and compressor kit to be
Storing the tire sealant and effective. See Roadside Assistance
Exhaust on page 9‑27. compressor kit or other Program on page 13‑6.
equipment in the passenger
Read and follow all of the tire
compartment of the vehicle could
sealant and compressor kit
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
instructions.
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
10-66 Vehicle Care
The kit includes: Tire Sealant Using the Tire Sealant and
Read and follow the safe handling Compressor Kit to Temporarily
instructions on the label adhered to Seal and Inflate a
the sealant canister. Punctured Tire
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal
A. Air Compressor one tire. After usage, the sealant
B. Tire Sealant Canister canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
C. Power Plug “Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following. When using the tire sealant
D. On/Off Button and compressor kit during cold
E. Pressure Gauge temperatures, warm the kit in a
F. Air Only Hose (Black) heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) faster.
Vehicle Care 10-67
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 4. Remove the valve stem cap from The compressor will inject
and wheel damage by driving slowly the flat tire by turning it sealant and air into the tire.
to a level place. Turn on the hazard counterclockwise. The pressure gauge (E) will
warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G) initially show a high pressure
Warning Flashers on page 6‑3. onto the tire valve stem. Turn it while the compressor pushes the
See If a Tire Goes Flat on clockwise until it is tight. sealant into the tire. Once the
page 10‑63 for other important 6. Plug the power plug (C) into the sealant is completely dispersed
safety warnings. accessory power outlet in the into the tire, the pressure will
Do not remove any objects that vehicle. Unplug all items from quickly drop and start to rise
have penetrated the tire. other accessory power outlets. again as the tire inflates with
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. air only.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage If the vehicle has an accessory 9. Inflate the tire to the
location. See Storing the Tire power outlet, do not use the recommended inflation pressure
Sealant and Compressor Kit on cigarette lighter. using the pressure gauge (E).
page 10‑72. The recommended inflation
If the vehicle only has a cigarette pressure can be found on the
Make sure the on/off button (D) lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Tire and Loading Information
is in the off O position. Do not pinch the power plug label. See Tire Pressure on
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) cord in the door or window. page 10‑49.
and the power plug (C). 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The pressure gauge (E) may
3. Place the kit on the ground. must be running while using the read higher than the actual tire
air compressor. pressure while the compressor is
Make sure the tire valve stem is on. Turn the compressor off to
positioned close to the ground 8. Press the on/off button (D) to get an accurate pressure
so the hose will reach it. turn the tire sealant and reading. The compressor may
compressor kit on. be turned on/off until the correct
pressure is reached.
10-68 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the recommended 11. Unplug the power plug (C) from Do not exceed the speed on
pressure cannot be reached after the accessory power outlet in this label until the damaged tire
approximately 25 minutes, the the vehicle. is repaired or replaced.
vehicle should not be driven 12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G) 16. Return the equipment to its
farther. The tire is too severely counterclockwise to remove it original storage location in the
damaged and the tire sealant and from the tire valve stem. vehicle.
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from 13. Replace the tire valve 17. Immediately drive the vehicle
the accessory power outlet and stem cap. 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
unscrew the inflating hose from 14. Replace the sealant/air sealant in the tire.
the tire valve. See Roadside hose (G), and the power 18. Stop at a safe location and
Assistance Program on plug (C) back in their check the tire pressure. Refer
page 13‑6. original location. to Steps 1 through 11 under
10. Press the on/off button (D) to “Using the Tire Sealant and
turn the tire sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant
compressor kit off. to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured).”
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the If the tire pressure has fallen
vehicle is driven and the more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
sealant is distributed in the tire. below the recommended
Therefore, Steps 11 through 15. If the flat tire was able to inflate inflation pressure, stop driving
17 must be done immediately to the recommended inflation the vehicle. The tire is too
after Step 10. pressure, remove the severely damaged and the tire
maximum speed label from the sealant cannot seal the tire.
Be careful while handling the sealant canister (B) and place See Roadside Assistance
tire sealant and compressor kit it in a highly visible location. Program on page 13‑6.
as it could be warm after
usage.
Vehicle Care 10-69
If the tire pressure has not Using the Tire Sealant and 1. Remove the tire sealant and
dropped more than 68 kPa Compressor Kit without compressor kit from its storage
(10 psi) from the recommended Sealant to Inflate a Tire location. See Storing the Tire
inflation pressure, inflate the (Not Punctured) Sealant and Compressor Kit on
tire to the recommended page 10‑72.
inflation pressure. To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant: 2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from
19. Wipe off any sealant from the the sealant canister (B) by
wheel, tire or vehicle. pulling up on the lever.
20. Dispose of the used sealant 3. Pull the air only hose (F) from
canister (B) and sealant/air the sealant canister (B).
hose (G) assembly at a local 4. Remove the power plug (C) from
dealer or in accordance with the air compressor (A).
local state codes and practices.
5. Place the kit on the ground.
21. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer. Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
22. After temporarily sealing a tire so the hose will reach it.
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the 6. Remove the tire valve stem cap
vehicle to an authorized dealer by turning it counterclockwise.
within 161 km (100 mi) of If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto
driving to have the tire repaired and wheel damage by driving slowly
the tire valve stem and press the
or replaced. to a level place. Turn on the hazard
lever down to secure it.
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑63 for other important
safety warnings.
10-70 Vehicle Care
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the 11. Inflate the tire to the 13. Unplug the power plug (C) from
accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation the accessory power outlet in
vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure the vehicle.
other accessory power outlets. gauge (E). The recommended 14. Disconnect the air only
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. inflation pressure can be found hose (F) from the tire valve
If the vehicle has an accessory on the Tire and Loading stem by lifting the lever.
power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire Replace the tire valve
cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10‑49. stem cap.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (E) may 15. Replace the air only hose (F)
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. read higher than the actual tire and the power plug (C) back in
pressure while the compressor its original location.
Do not pinch the power plug is on. Turn the compressor off
cord in the door or window. to get an accurate reading. 16. Place the equipment in the
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The compressor may be turned original storage location in the
must be running while using the on/off until the correct pressure vehicle.
air compressor. is reached. The tire sealant and compressor kit
10. Press the on/off button (D) to 12. Press the on/off button (D) to has an accessory adapter located in
turn the compressor on. turn the tire sealant and a compartment on the bottom of its
compressor kit off. housing that may be used to inflate
The compressor will inflate the air mattresses, balls, etc.
tire with air only. Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
Vehicle Care 10-71
Removal and Installation of the To install a new sealant canister:

Sealant Canister 1. Align the sealant/air hose (G)
To remove the sealant canister: with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister (B)
down and turn it clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G)
around the air compressor
channel to stow it in its original
location.
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from
the sealant canister (B) by 4. Push the air only hose (F) onto
pulling up on the lever. 4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so the sealant canister inlet and
the inflator filling hose is aligned push the lever down.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from with the slot in the compressor.
the sealant canister (B).
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) the compressor and replace with
from the compressor (A). a new sealant canister. See your
dealer for more information.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant the same time. Then pull the Tire Changing
access panel rearward and up to
and Compressor Kit remove it. Removing the Spare Tire and
The tire sealant and compressor kit Tools
is located in the trunk, under the To access the spare tire and tools:
load floor, behind an access panel.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
To remove the kit:
page 2‑12.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
2. Lift the load floor.
page 2‑12.
3. Pull the inflator kit rearward.

Squeeze the two tabs of the
quick release buckle to remove
the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
To store the inflator kit, reverse A. Retainer Nut
2. Turn the left knob the steps.
counterclockwise and the right B. Tool Bag Tether
knob clockwise, 90 degrees, at C. Tool Bag
D. Spare Tire
Vehicle Care 10-73
3. Turn the retainer nut (A) Removing the Flat Tire and
counterclockwise to remove it. Installing the Spare Tire
Then remove the tool bag
tether (B) from the stow rod, the This vehicle may have aluminum
tool bag (C) containing the wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
wheel wrench and wheel blocks, Use the wheel wrench to loosen all
and the spare tire (D). the wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
4. Remove the jack, jack handle
extension, and two-piece Or, this vehicle may have steel
wrench, if equipped. wheels with plastic covers.
A. Three-Piece Wrench
B. Hex Head Jack
C. Jack Handle Extension
D. Coin/Pierce Jack
E. Two-Piece Wrench
This vehicle may have one of
the following: A coin/pierce
jack (D), a jack handle
extension (C), and a
two-piece wrench (E), or a To remove the plastic covers and
hex head jack (B) and wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic
three-piece wrench (A). nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction.
10-74 Vehicle Care
If needed, finish loosening them

with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
If needed, use the flat end of the
wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off.
The edge of the wheel cover could
be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop
the cover or lay it face down, as it
could become scratched or
damaged. Store the wheel cover in
the trunk until the flat tire is repaired 2. Turn the wheel wrench 5. If this vehicle is the RS model,
or replaced. counterclockwise once on each locate the front or rear jack
Once you have removed the wheel wheel nut to loosen it. Do not cover on the rocker molding
cover, use the following procedure remove them yet. near the tire being changed.
to remove the flat tire and install the 3. Place the jack near the flat tire. Place your hand behind the
spare tire. edge of the cover on the rocker
4. Place the wheel blocks on both
1. Do a safety check before sides of the tire at the opposite molding. Pull down and out to
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes corner of the tire being changed. remove the cover.
Flat on page 10‑63 for more See If a Tire Goes Flat on The cover will remain attached
information. page 10‑63 for proper wheel to the molding by a tether.
block placement.
Vehicle Care 10-75
6. Place the jack under the vehicle.

7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,
{ WARNING
attach the jack handle extension Raising the vehicle with the jack
to the jack by sliding the hook improperly positioned can
through the end of the jack. damage the vehicle and even
If you have a hex head jack, make the vehicle fall. To help
place the hex tube end of the avoid personal injury and vehicle
wrench over the hex head of damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
the jack. head into the proper location
Notice: Make sure that the jack before raising the vehicle.
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle. 8. Position the jack lift head at the
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
jack location nearest the flat tire. { WARNING
The location is indicated by a
notch in the flange. The jack Lifting a vehicle and getting under
must not be used in any other it to do maintenance or repairs is
position. dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
{ WARNING training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
Getting under a vehicle when it is changing a flat tire. If it is used for
jacked up is dangerous. If the anything else, you or others could
vehicle slips off the jack, you be badly injured or killed if the
could be badly injured or killed. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
Never get under a vehicle when it is provided with the vehicle, only
is supported only by a jack. use it for changing a flat tire.
10-76 Vehicle Care
Hex Head Jack Shown, Coin/ Make sure the jack lift head 10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
Pierce Jack Similar notch is placed in the flange 11. Remove the flat tire.
9. Raise the jack by turning the notch.
handle clockwise until it comes Raise the vehicle far enough off
in contact with the notch in the ground so there is enough
the flange. room for the road tire to clear
the ground.
Vehicle Care 10-77
{ WARNING { WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Never use oil or grease on bolts
parts to which it is fastened, can or nuts because the nuts might
make wheel nuts become loose come loose. The vehicle's wheel
after time. The wheel could come could fall off, causing a crash.
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any 14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
rust or dirt from places where the Tighten each nut by hand until
wheel attaches to the vehicle. the wheel is held against
In an emergency, a cloth or a the hub.
paper towel can be used;
12. Remove any rust or dirt from 15. Lower the vehicle by
however, use a scraper or wire
the wheel bolts, mounting turning the jack handle
brush later to remove all rust surfaces, and spare wheel. counterclockwise.
or dirt.
13. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
10-78 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel Front Jack Cover Shown, Rear
16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
nuts. See Capacities and Jack Cover Similar
a crisscross sequence, as
Specifications on page 12‑2 for shown.
original equipment wheel nut 19. If this vehicle is the RS model,
torque specifications. 17. Lower the jack all the way and snap the jack cover back into
remove the jack from under the place.
vehicle. 20. Remove the wheel blocks and
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake 18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly return them to their proper
with the wheel wrench. storage location.
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs, When reinstalling the wheel cover or
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in center cap on the full-size tire,
the proper sequence and to the tighten all five plastic caps hand
proper torque specification. See snug with the aid of the wheel
Capacities and Specifications on wrench and tighten them with the
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut wheel wrench an additional
torque specification. one‐quarter of a turn.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit 6. Place the tool bag tether over
on the vehicle's compact spare. the stow rod and the tool bag
If you try to put a wheel cover on rear of the flat tire.
the compact spare, the cover or 7. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
the spare could be damaged. until tight.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire 8. Replace the load floor.
and Tools
The load floor may not lay flat.
{ WARNING The compact spare is for temporary

use only. Replace the compact
Storing a jack, a tire, or other spare tire with a full-size tire as
equipment in the passenger soon as you can.
Coin/Pierce Jack Shown, Hex
compartment of the vehicle could Storing the Compact Spare Tire
Head Jack Similar
cause injury. In a sudden stop or and Tools
collision, loose equipment could 3. Place the flat tire in the storage
strike someone. Store all these in compartment with the valve Reverse the instructions for
stem down. removing the spare tire and tools to
the proper place.
store the compact spare tire.
4. Place the jack and jack handle
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools extension, if the vehicle has one,
in the foam container.
1. Replace the wheel wrench and
wheel blocks in the tool bag. 5. Place the foam container inside
the flat tire. Align the hole with
2. Remove the foam container from the stow rod.
the rear storage compartment.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire tire repaired or replaced at your Jump Starting

convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire For more information about the
{ WARNING as soon as possible. The spare tire vehicle battery, see Battery on
will last longer and be in good page 10‑25.
Driving with more than one
shape in case it is needed again. If the battery has run down, try to
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and Notice: When the compact spare use another vehicle and some
handling. This could lead to a is installed, do not take the jumper cables to start your vehicle.
crash and you or others could be vehicle through an automatic car Be sure to use the following steps to
injured. Use only one compact wash with guide rails. The do it safely.
spare tire at a time. compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel, and other parts of the
{ WARNING
If this vehicle has a compact spare vehicle. Batteries can hurt you. They can
tire, it was fully inflated when the be dangerous because:
vehicle was new; however, it can Do not use the compact spare on
lose air after a time. Check the other vehicles. . They contain acid that can
inflation pressure regularly. Do not mix the compact spare tire or burn you.
It should be 420 kPa (60 psi). wheel with other wheels or tires. . They contain gas that can
After installing the compact spare They will not fit. Keep the spare tire explode or ignite.
on the vehicle, stop as soon as and its wheel together. . They contain enough
possible and make sure the spare Notice: Tire chains will not fit the electricity to burn you.
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare. Using them can
compact spare is made to perform damage the vehicle and can If you do not follow these steps
well at speeds up to 105 km/h damage the chains too. Do not exactly, some or all of these
(65 mph) for distances up to use tire chains on the compact things can hurt you.
5 000 km (3,000 mi), so you can spare.
finish your trip and have the full-size
Vehicle Care 10-81
Notice: Ignoring these steps The jump start negative grounding transmission. See Shifting Into
could result in costly damage to point (D) is the engine block or an Park (Automatic Transmission)
the vehicle that would not be engine mounting bolt. Connect to a on page 9‑24 with an automatic
covered by the warranty. spot as far away from the transmission, or Parking on
Trying to start the vehicle by discharged battery as possible. page 9‑27 with a manual
pushing or pulling it will not These locations are used instead of transmission.
work, and it could damage the a direct connection to the battery. Notice: If the radio or other
vehicle. The positive jump start connection accessories are left on during the
is under a trim cover. Open the jump starting procedure, they
cover door to expose the terminal. could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
1. Check the other vehicle. It must warranty. Always turn off the
have a 12-volt battery with a radio and other accessories when
negative ground system. jump starting the vehicle.
Notice: Only use a vehicle that 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
has a 12-volt system with a Turn off all lights and
negative ground for jump accessories in both vehicles,
starting. If the other vehicle does except the hazard warning
not have a 12-volt system with a flashers if needed.
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
{ WARNING
The jump start positive post (B) is 2. Position the two vehicles so that
located in the engine compartment they are not touching. An electric fan can start up even
on the driver side of the vehicle. when the engine is not running
3. Set the parking brake firmly and
and can injure you. Keep hands,
put the shift lever in P (Park)
clothing and tools away from any
with an automatic transmission,
or Neutral with a manual underhood electric fan.
10-82 Vehicle Care
7. Connect one end of the

{ WARNING { WARNING black negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) terminal of the
Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine good battery (C).
cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving 8. Connect the other end of the
and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running. black negative (–) cable to the
Use a flashlight if you need negative (–) grounding point (D).
more light. 9. Start the engine in the vehicle
with the good battery and run
Be sure the battery has enough
the engine at idle speed for at
water. You do not need to add
least four minutes.
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery 10. Try to start the vehicle that had
has filler caps, be sure the right the dead battery. If it will not
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, start after a few tries, it
add water to take care of that probably needs service.
first. If you don't, explosive gas Notice: If the jumper cables are
could be present. connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
Battery fluid contains acid that
may occur and damage the
can burn you. Do not get it on vehicle. The repairs would not be
you. If you accidentally get it in 5. Connect one end of the red
your eyes or on your skin, flush positive (+) cable to the jump
Always connect and remove the
the place with water and get start positive (+) post (B).
jumper cables in the correct
medical help immediately. 6. Connect the other end of the order, making sure that the
red positive (+) cable to the cables do not touch each other or
positive (+) terminal of the other metal.
good battery (A).
Vehicle Care 10-83
To disconnect the jumper cables Towing

from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead Notice: To avoid damage, the
battery. disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the
2. Disconnect the black ground. Care must be taken with
negative (−) cable from the vehicles that have low ground
vehicle with the good battery. clearance and/or special
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) equipment. Always flatbed on a
cable from the vehicle with the car carrier.
Jumper Cable Removal good battery. Consult your dealer or a
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) professional towing service if the
Part or Remote Negative (–) cable from the other vehicle. disabled vehicle must be towed.
Terminal See Roadside Assistance Program
5. Return the covers over the on page 13‑6.
B. Good Battery or Remote positive (+) and negative (–)
Positive (+) and Remote terminals to their original To tow the vehicle behind another
Negative (–) Terminals positions. vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
C. Dead Battery or Remote “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in
Positive (+) Terminal this section.
10-84 Vehicle Care
Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing

consider before recreational (With Automatic Transmission)
Towing vehicle towing:
Recreational vehicle towing refers to . The towing capacity of the
towing the vehicle behind another towing vehicle. Be sure to read
vehicle – such as behind a motor the tow vehicle manufacturer's
home. The two most common types recommendations.
of recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly . How far the vehicle will be
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the towed. Some vehicles have
vehicle with all four wheels on the restrictions on how far and how
ground. Dolly towing is towing the long they can tow.
vehicle with two wheels on the . The proper towing equipment.
ground and two wheels up on a See your dealer or trailering
device known as a dolly. professional for additional
advice and equipment Notice: If the vehicle is towed
recommendations. with all four wheels on the
. If the vehicle is ready to be ground, the drivetrain
towed. Just as preparing the components could be damaged.
vehicle for a long trip, make sure The repairs would not be covered
the vehicle is prepared to be by the vehicle warranty. Do not
towed. tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Vehicles with an automatic To dinghy tow the vehicle from the Remember to reinstall the fuses
transmission should not be front with all four wheels on the once the destination has been
towed with all four wheels on the ground: reached.
ground. If the vehicle must be 1. Position the vehicle to tow and Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
towed, a dolly should be used. then secure it to the towing exceeded while towing the
See “Dolly Towing” that follows for vehicle. vehicle, it could be damaged.
more information. Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
2. Shift the transmission to Neutral.
Dinghy Towing while towing the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition to
(With Manual Transmission)
ACC/ACCESSORY.
4. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove fuse 22,
23, 24, and 25 from the
instrument panel fuse block.
See Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10‑40 for more
information.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a Appearance Care

straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing. Exterior Care
5. Remove the key from the Washing the Vehicle
ignition. To preserve the vehicle's finish,
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. wash it often and out of direct
sunlight.
7. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Do not use petroleum
based, acidic, or abrasive
cleaning agents as they can
damage the vehicle's paint, metal,
or plastic parts. If damage
occurs, it would not be covered
Tow the vehicle with the two rear
by the vehicle's warranty.
wheels on the ground and the front
Approved cleaning products can
wheels on a dolly:
be obtained from your dealer.
To tow the vehicle with two wheels Follow all manufacturer
on the ground and a dolly: directions regarding correct
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
2. Shift the automatic transmission disposal of any vehicle care
into P (Park) or a manual Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also, product.
transmission into 1 (First) gear.
repairs would not be covered by
3. Set the parking brake. the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Vehicle Care 10-87
Notice: Avoid using high If the vehicle has a basecoat/ If necessary, use non-abrasive
pressure washes closer than clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat cleaners that are marked safe for
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the gives more depth and gloss to the painted surfaces to remove
vehicle. Use of power washers colored basecoat. Always use foreign matter.
exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) waxes and polishes that are To keep the paint finish looking new,
can result in damage or removal non-abrasive and made for a keep the vehicle garaged or
of paint and decals. basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. covered whenever possible.
Rinse the vehicle well, before Notice: Machine compounding
washing and after, to remove all or aggressive polishing on a Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
cleaning agents completely. If they basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
are allowed to dry on the surface, may damage it. Use only Regularly clean bright metal parts
they could stain. non-abrasive waxes and polishes with water or chrome polish on
that are made for a basecoat/ chrome or stainless steel trim,
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
clearcoat paint finish on the if necessary.
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water vehicle. For aluminum, never use auto or
spotting. Foreign materials such as calcium chrome polish, steam, or caustic
chloride and other salts, ice melting soap to clean. A coating of wax,
Finish Care agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, rubbed to high polish, is
Occasional waxing or mild polishing bird droppings, chemicals from recommended for all bright
of the vehicle by hand may be industrial chimneys, etc., can metal parts.
necessary to remove residue from damage the vehicle's finish if they
the paint finish. Approved cleaning remain on painted surfaces. Wash
products can be obtained from the vehicle as soon as possible.
your dealer.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires

Lenses and Emblems Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a with glass cleaner. clean the tires.
soft cloth, and a car washing soap Clean rubber blades using lint-free Notice: Using petroleum-based
to clean exterior lamps and lenses. cloth or paper towel soaked with tire dressing products on the
Follow instructions under "Washing windshield washer fluid or a mild vehicle may damage the paint
the Vehicle" later in this section. detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying
Shutter System thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle.
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
caused by extreme dusty soap and water to clean the wheels.
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, After rinsing thoroughly with clean
snow and ice. water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
Weatherstrips
Keep the wheels clean using a
Apply silicone grease on soft, clean cloth with mild soap and
weatherstrips to make them last water. Rinse with clean water. After
The vehicle may have a shutter longer, seal better, and not stick or rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
system designed to help increase squeak. See Recommended Fluids clean towel. A wax may then be
fuel economy. Keep the shutter and Lubricants on page 11‑13 applied.
system clean for proper operation. Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
Vehicle Care 10-89
driving on roads that have been Steering, Suspension, and Underbody Maintenance
sprayed with magnesium, Chassis Components Use plain water to flush dirt and
calcium, or sodium chloride.
Visually inspect front and rear debris from the vehicle's underbody.
These chlorides are used on
suspension and steering system for Your dealer or an underbody car
roads for conditions such as
damaged, loose, or missing parts or washing system can do this. If not
ice and dust. Always wash the
signs of wear. Inspect power removed, rust and corrosion can
chrome with soap and water
steering lines and hoses for proper develop.
after exposure.
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
Notice: To avoid surface damage, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
Sheet Metal Damage
do not use strong soaps, velocity joints, rubber boots, and If the vehicle is damaged and
chemicals, abrasive polishes, axle seals for leaks. requires sheet metal repair or
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners replacement, make sure the body
that contain acid on aluminum or Body Component Lubrication repair shop applies anti-corrosion
chrome-plated wheels. Use only Lubricate all key lock cylinders, material to parts repaired or
approved cleaners. Also, never hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and replaced to restore corrosion
drive a vehicle with aluminum or steel fuel door hinge unless the protection.
chrome-plated wheels through an components are plastic. Applying
automatic car wash that uses Original manufacturer replacement
silicone grease on weatherstrips parts will provide the corrosion
silicone carbide tire cleaning with a clean cloth will make them
brushes. Damage could occur protection while maintaining the
last longer, seal better, and not stick vehicle warranty.
and the repairs would not be or squeak.
10-90 Vehicle Care
Finish Damage Interior Care Use cleaners specifically designed

for the surfaces being cleaned to
Quickly repair minor chips and To prevent dirt particle abrasions, prevent permanent damage.
scratches with touch-up materials regularly clean the vehicle's interior. To prevent overspray, apply all
available from your dealer to avoid Immediately remove any soils. Note cleaners directly to the cleaning
corrosion. Larger areas of finish that newspapers or dark garments cloth. Cleaners should be removed
damage can be corrected in your that can transfer color to home quickly. Never allow cleaners to
dealer's body and paint shop. furnishings can also permanently remain on the surface being
Chemical Paint Spotting transfer color to the vehicle's cleaned for extended periods
interior. of time.
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
Use a soft bristle brush to remove Cleaners may contain solvents that
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
dust from knobs and crevices on the can become concentrated in the
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
instrument cluster. Using a mild interior. Before using cleaners, read
discolorations, and small, irregular
soap solution, immediately remove and adhere to all safety instructions
dark spots etched into the paint
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect on the label. While cleaning the
surface.
repellant from all interior surfaces or interior, maintain adequate
permanent damage may result. ventilation by opening the doors
Your dealer may have products for and windows.
cleaning the interior.
Vehicle Care 10-91
To prevent damage, do not clean

. Do not heavily saturate the Fabric/Carpet
the interior using the following upholstery when cleaning.
Start by vacuuming the surface
cleaners or techniques: . Do not use solvents or cleaners using a soft brush attachment. If a
. Never use a razor or any other containing solvents. rotating brush attachment is being
sharp object to remove a soil Interior Glass used during vacuuming, only use it
from any interior surface. on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric gently remove as much of the soil
. Never use a brush with stiff dampened with water. Wipe droplets
bristles. as possible using one of the
left behind with a clean dry cloth. following techniques:
. Never rub any surface Commercial glass cleaners may be
aggressively or with excessive used, if necessary, after cleaning
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
pressure. the interior glass with plain water. towel. Continue blotting until no
more soil can be removed.
. Do not use laundry detergents or Notice: To prevent scratching,
dishwashing soaps with never use abrasive cleaners on
. For solid soils, remove as much
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, automotive glass. Abrasive as possible prior to vacuuming.
use approximately 20 drops cleaners or aggressive cleaning
per 3.78L (1 gal) of water. may damage the rear window
A concentrated soap solution will defogger.
leave a residue that creates
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap.
10-92 Vehicle Care
To clean: cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small Do not use cleaners that contain
1. Saturate a clean lint-free hidden area for colorfastness before silicone or wax-based products.
colorfast cloth with water or using a commercial upholstery Cleaners containing these
club soda. Microfiber cloth is cleaner or spot lifter. If ring solvents can permanently change
recommended to prevent lint formation occurs, clean the the appearance and feel of leather
transfer to the fabric or carpet. entire fabric or carpet. or soft trim and are not
Following the cleaning process, a recommended.
2. Remove excess moisture by
gently wringing until water does paper towel can be used to blot Do not use cleaners that increase
not drip from the cleaning cloth. excess moisture. gloss, especially on the instrument
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
3. Start on the outside edge of the Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and visibility through the windshield
soil and gently rub toward the Other Plastic Surfaces under certain conditions.
center. Rotate the cleaning cloth Use a soft microfiber cloth
to a clean area frequently to Notice: Use of air fresheners may
dampened with water to remove cause permanent damage to
prevent forcing the soil in to dust and loose dirt. For a more
the fabric. plastics and painted surfaces.
thorough cleaning, use a soft If an air freshener comes in
4. Continue gently rubbing the microfiber cloth dampened with a contact with any plastic or
soiled area until there is no mild soap solution. painted surface in the vehicle,
longer any color transfer from Notice: Soaking or saturating blot immediately and clean with a
the soil to the cleaning cloth. leather, especially perforated soft cloth dampened with a mild
5. If the soil is not completely leather, as well as other interior soap solution. Damage caused by
removed, use a mild soap surfaces, may cause permanent air fresheners would not be
solution followed only by club damage. Wipe excess moisture covered by the vehicle warranty.
soda or plain water. from these surfaces after
cleaning and allow them to dry
If the soil is not completely
naturally. Never use heat, steam,
removed, it may be necessary to
spot lifters or spot removers.
use a commercial upholstery
Vehicle Care 10-93
Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage:
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
{ WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
It may severely weaken them. In interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
a crash, they might not be able to pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
provide adequate protection. Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
Clean safety belts only with mild cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
soap and lukewarm water. and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a the floor mats do not interfere
crash and injury. Make sure the with the pedals.
floor mat does not interfere with . Use the floor mat with the
the pedals. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mats
Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
to unlock each retainer and remove.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat

retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snap into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and Recommended Fluids,

Lubricants, and Parts
General Information
Maintenance Recommended Fluids and Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Maintenance Replacement the required maintenance for the
General Information Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 vehicle. Follow this schedule to
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 help protect against major repair
Maintenance Records expenses resulting from neglect or
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16 inadequate maintenance. It may
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Your dealer has trained technicians
Additional Maintenance who can perform required
and Care maintenance using genuine
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 up‐to‐date tools and equipment
for fast and accurate diagnostics.
Many dealers have extended
evening and Saturday hours,
courtesy transportation, and
online scheduling to assist with
service needs.
Your dealer recognizes the
importance of providing
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
With trained technicians, the dealer Because of the way people use The Additional Required Services ‐
is the place for routine maintenance vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Severe are for vehicles that are:
such as oil changes and tire There may need to be more . Mainly driven in hilly or
rotations and additional frequent checks and services. mountainous terrain.
maintenance items like tires, The Additional Required Services ‐
. Frequently towing a trailer.
brakes, batteries, and wiper blades. Normal are for vehicles that:
Notice: Damage caused by . Carry passengers and cargo . Used for high speed or
improper maintenance can lead to within recommended limits on competitive driving.
costly repairs and may not be the Tire and Loading Information . Used for taxi, police, or delivery
covered by the vehicle warranty. label. See Vehicle Load Limits service.
Maintenance intervals, checks, on page 9‑10.
inspections, recommended fluids, Refer to the information in the
. Are driven on reasonable road Maintenance Schedule Additional
and lubricants are important to surfaces within legal driving
keep the vehicle in good working Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
limits.
condition.
. Use the recommended fuel.
The Tire Rotation and Required See Recommended Fuel on
Services are the responsibility of the page 9‑44.
vehicle owner. It is recommended to
have your dealer perform these Refer to the information in the
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Maintenance Schedule Additional
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.
Maintenance Engine Oil Change

{ WARNING When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Performing maintenance work can
Schedule SOON DIC message or Code 82
be dangerous and can cause Owner Checks and Services DIC message displays, have the
serious injury. Perform engine oil and filter changed within
At Each Fuel Stop the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven
maintenance work only if the
required information, proper tools, . Check the engine oil level. See under the best conditions, the
and equipment are available. Engine Oil on page 10‑9. engine oil life system might not
If they are not, see your dealer to indicate the need for vehicle service
Once a Month for more than a year. The engine oil
have a trained technician do the
. Check the tire inflation and filter must be changed at least
work. See Doing Your Own
pressures. See Tire Pressure on once a year and the oil life system
Service Work on page 10‑4.
page 10‑49. must be reset. Your trained dealer
technician can perform this work.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See If the engine oil life system is reset
Tire Inspection on page 10‑55. accidentally, service the vehicle
. Check the windshield washer within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on last service. Reset the oil life
page 10‑22. system when the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑12.
Tire Rotation and Required

. Visually inspect windshield wiper . Visually inspect steering,
Services Every 12 000 km/ blades for wear, cracking, suspension, and chassis
or contamination. See Exterior components for damaged, loose,
7,500 mi Care on page 10‑86. Replace or missing parts or signs of
Rotate the tires, if recommended for worn or damaged wiper blades. wear. See Exterior Care on
the vehicle, and perform the See Wiper Blade Replacement page 10‑86.
following services. See Tire on page 10‑28. . Check restraint system
Rotation on page 10‑55. . Check tire inflation pressures. components. See Safety System
. Check engine oil level and oil See Tire Pressure on Check on page 3‑17.
life percentage. If needed, page 10‑49. . Visually inspect fuel system for
change engine oil and filter, and . Inspect tire wear. See Tire damage or leaks.
reset oil life system. See Engine
Inspection on page 10‑55. . Visually inspect exhaust system
Oil on page 10‑9 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑12. . Visually check for fluid leaks. and nearby heat shields for
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. loose or damaged parts.
. Check engine coolant level. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on . Lubricate body components.
page 10‑14. See Exterior Care on
. Check windshield washer fluid
. Inspect brake system. page 10‑86.
level. See Washer Fluid on
. Check starter switch. See Starter
page 10‑22.
Switch Check on page 10‑26.

. Check automatic transmission . Visually inspect gas strut for
shift lock control function. See signs of wear, cracks, or other
Automatic Transmission Shift damage. Check the hold open
Lock Control Function Check on ability of the strut. See your
page 10‑26. dealer if service is required.
. Check ignition transmission lock. . Check tire sealant expiration
See Ignition Transmission Lock date, if equipped. See Tire
Check on page 10‑27. Sealant and Compressor Kit on
. Check parking brake and page 10‑65.
automatic transmission park . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
mechanism. See Park Brake and if equipped. See Sunroof on
P (Park) Mechanism Check on page 2‑21.
page 10‑27.
. Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.

Footnotes — Maintenance d) Or every five years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services — Normal page 10‑16.
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines e) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook‐up, comes first. Inspect for fraying,
routing, and condition. Check that excessive cracking, or damage;
the purge valve, if the vehicle has replace, if needed.
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
b) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
c) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.

Footnotes — Maintenance d) Or every five years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services — Severe page 10‑16. Services
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines e) Or every 10 years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use
and hoses for proper hook‐up, comes first. Inspect for fraying, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
routing, and condition. Check that excessive cracking, or damage; components every 5 000 km/
the purge valve, if the vehicle replace, if needed. 3,000 mi.
has one, works properly. . Have underbody flushing service
Replace as needed.
performed once a year.
b) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
c) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break‐down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. It is recommended that the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
your dealer perform these the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
services — their trained dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
technicians know your vehicle best. corrosion‐free.
Fluids
Your dealer can also perform a Belts
thorough assessment with a Proper fluid levels and approved
multi‐point inspection to recommend . Belts may need replacing if fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
when your vehicle may need they squeak or show signs of and components. See
attention. The following list is cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
intended to explain the services and . Trained dealer technicians Lubricants on page 11‑13 for
conditions to look for that may can inspect the belts and GM approved fluids.
indicate services are required. recommend replacement . Engine oil and windshield
when necessary. washer fluid levels should be
checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that
fluids may be low and need
to be filled.
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multi‐point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer right tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multi‐point Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure like new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicle’s interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10‑90 and Exterior Care on
. With a multi‐point inspection, the tires can save money, fuel, and page 10‑86.
your dealer can check the lamps can reduce the risk of tire failure.
and note any concerns. . Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
Wheel Alignment Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
Engine Oil the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System
(GM Part No. 88863461, in Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock Cylinders
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting
and Release Pawl requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 13272719 AC3144C
1.8L L4 Engine 13272720 AC3145C
Engine Oil Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 93185674 PF2257G
1.8L L4 Engine 93185674 PF2257G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176
Spark Plugs
1.4L L4 Engine 55576026 41–117
1.8L L4 Engine 55580961 41–120
Wiper Blades
Driver – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 96910777 —
Passenger – 45.0 cm (17.7 in) 96910780 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑13 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
1.4L L4 Engine 5.5 L 5.8 qt
1.8L L4 Engine 6.5 L 6.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 4.0 L 4.25 qt
1.8L L4 Engine 4.5 L 4.76 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Fuel Tank
Standard Fuel Tank 59.0 L 15.6 gal
With RPO NL6 Fuel Tank 48.0 L 12.6 gal
Transmission Fluid
Automatic — 6 Speed 4.0 L 4.2 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in
this manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
1.4L L4 Engine C 0.70 mm (0.028 in)
Manual
Automatic
1.8L L4 Engine H 0.70 mm (0.028 in)
Manual
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
1.8L L4 Engine (with Air 1.8L L4 Engine (without Air

Conditioning) Conditioning)
1.4L L4 Engine
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with the new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Canada Limited wants you to be 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
aware of its participation in a or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
no-charge Mediation/Arbitration The Mediation/Arbitration Program
Program. General Motors of Canada United States
c/o Customer Care Centre
Limited has committed to binding General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
arbitration of owner disputes Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer
involving factory-related vehicle 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Assistance Center
service claims. The program Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
provides for the review of the facts Detroit, MI 48232-5170
involved by an impartial third party The inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
arbiter, and may include an informal by the Vehicle Identification
hearing before the arbiter. The Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
program is designed so that the 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
entire dispute settlement process, Telephone Devices (TTYs))
from the time you file your complaint Roadside Assistance:
to the final decision, should be 1-800-243-8872
completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America, and Online Owner Center
1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)
U.S. Virgin Islands) www.chevyownercenter.com
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
General Motors de Mexico, S. de Information and services
1-800-496-9994 customized for your specific
R.L. de C.V.
Canada Customer Assistance Center vehicle — all in one convenient
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 place.
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
. Digital owner manual, warranty
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F. information, and more.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive 01-800-466-0800 . Storage for online service and
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 maintenance records.
www.gm.ca . Chevrolet dealer locator for
1-800-263-3777 (English) Customer Assistance for service nationwide.
1-800-263-7854 (French) Text Telephone (TTY) . Exclusive privileges and offers.
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Users . Recall notices for your specific
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle.
1-800-268-6800 hard of hearing, or speech-impaired . OnStar and GM Cardmember
and who use Text Telephones
Overseas Services Earnings summaries.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
Please contact the local General equipment available at its Customer
Motors Business Unit. Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility
and services you will have
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
access to:
Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
. FAQ as address and phone number
. Contact Us for each of your preferred GM
dealers. This program is available to
My GM Canada www.gm.ca qualified applicants for cost
. My Driveway: Access quick links reimbursement of eligible
My GM Canada is a to parts and service estimates, aftermarket adaptive equipment
password-protected section of check trade-in values, required for the vehicle, such as
www.gm.ca where you can save or schedule a service hand controls or a wheelchair/
information on GM vehicles, get appointment by adding the scooter lift for the vehicle.
personalized offers, and use handy vehicles you own to your
tools and forms with greater ease. driveway profile. For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
. My Preferences: Manage your call the GM Mobility Assistance
profile and use tools and forms Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
with greater ease. Telephone (TTY) users, call
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca 1-800-833-9935.
section within www.gm.ca. General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.

. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or
Program delivery date of the vehicle. the same type of claim is made
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, . Description of the problem. many times.
call 1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text
Telephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). Coverage Services Provided
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, Services are provided up to 5 years/ . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
call 1-800-268-6800. 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever Delivery of enough fuel for the
comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest
Service is available 24 hours a day, service station.
365 days a year. In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Lock‐Out Service: Service to
Calling for Assistance person driving the vehicle without unlock the vehicle if you are
permission from the owner is not locked out. A remote unlock may
When calling Roadside Assistance,
covered. be available if you have OnStar.
have the following information
For security reasons, the driver
ready: Roadside Assistance is not a part of must present identification
. Your name, home address, and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. before this service is given.
home telephone number. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to . Emergency Tow from a Public
. Telephone number of your make any changes or discontinue Road or Highway: Tow to the
location. the Roadside Assistance program at nearest Chevrolet dealer for
. Location of the vehicle. any time without notification. warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
. Model, year, color, and license Chevrolet and General Motors of driven. Assistance is also given
plate number of the vehicle. Canada Limited reserve the right to when the vehicle is stuck in the
limit services or payment to an sand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
change a flat tire with the spare Canadian-Purchased Vehicles Assistance: Must be over
tire. The spare tire, if equipped, 250 kilometers from where your
must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement trip was started to qualify.
properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian. General Motors of
responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be Canada Limited requires
replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other pre-authorization, original
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through detailed receipts, and a
this service. copy of the repair orders. Once
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle authorization has been received,
registration is required. the Roadside Assistance advisor
Services Not Included in will help to make arrangements
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed and explain how to receive
Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are payment.
. Impound towing caused by provided when requested either
violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the
. Alternative Service:
most scenic route. There is a If assistance cannot be
. Legal fines. provided right away, the
limit of six requests per year.
. Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is Roadside Assistance advisor
or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three may give permission to get local
chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery. emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
. Towing or services for vehicles
after sending the original receipt
driven on a non-public road or
to Roadside Assistance.
highway.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options

Appointments Program Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
service, contact your dealer and experience, we and our participating
to minimize inconvenience by
request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
providing several transportation
scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support
options. Depending on the
and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the
circumstances, your dealer can
of your transportation needs, your Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
offer one of the following:
dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada),
inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle Service
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled hybrid‐specific warranties in both
Shuttle service is the preferred
into the service department the U.S. and Canada.
means of offering Courtesy
immediately, keep driving it until it Several Courtesy Transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide
can be scheduled for service, options are available to assist in shuttle service to get you to your
unless, of course, the problem is reducing inconvenience when destination with minimal interruption
safety related. If it is, please call warranty repairs are required. of your daily schedule. This includes
your dealership, let them know this, Courtesy Transportation is not a one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
and ask for instructions. part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance
If your dealer requests you to bring Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area.
the vehicle for service, you are entitled “Warranty and Owner
urged to do so as early in the work Assistance Information” furnished
day as possible to allow for with each new vehicle provides
same-day repair. detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the right to
Reimbursement and must be supported by original unilaterally modify, change,
If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign or discontinue Courtesy
warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to
transportation is used instead of and meet state/provincial, local, and resolve all questions of claim
your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements. eligibility pursuant to the terms and
expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include conditions described herein at its
original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements, sole discretion.
to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
GM for shuttle service. In addition, You are responsible for fuel usage Collision Damage Repair
for U.S. customers, should you charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage If the vehicle is involved in a
arrange transportation through a collision and it is damaged, have the
friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the damage repaired by a qualified
reimbursement for reasonable fuel technician using the proper
expenses may be available. Claim repair.
equipment and quality replacement
amounts should reflect actual costs It may not be possible to provide a parts. Poorly performed collision
and be supported by original like vehicle as a courtesy rental. repairs diminish the vehicle resale
receipts. See your dealer for value, and safety performance can
information regarding the allowance Additional Program
be compromised in subsequent
amounts for reimbursement of fuel Information collisions.
or other transportation costs. All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at Collision Parts
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
every dealer. Please contact your Genuine GM Collision parts are new
Your dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information parts made with the same materials
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or about availability. All Courtesy and construction methods as the
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will parts with which the vehicle was
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept be administered by appropriate originally built.
for an overnight warranty repair. dealer personnel.
Genuine GM Collision parts are the As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
best choice to ensure that the poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
vehicle's designed appearance, corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
durability, and safety are preserved. perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
The use of Genuine GM parts can collisions. Aftermarket parts are vehicle by limiting compensation
help maintain the GM New Vehicle not covered by the GM New Vehicle for damage repairs by using
Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer not available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair company may require you to have
these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained insurance that ensures repairs with
are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable Genuine GM Original Equipment
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
related failures are not covered by Insuring the Vehicle Genuine Manufacturer replacement
that warranty. parts. Read the lease carefully, as
Protect your investment in the you may be charged at the end of
Aftermarket collision parts are also GM vehicle with comprehensive and
available. These are made by the lease for poor quality repairs.
collision insurance coverage. There
companies other than GM and may are significant differences in the
not have been tested for the vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember,
Number (VIN). recycled parts will not be covered by
If there has been an injury, call . Insurance company and policy the GM vehicle warranty.
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all number. Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the but you must live with the repair.
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle. Depending on your policy limits,
puts you in danger, or you are your insurance company may
Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using
instructed to move it by a
that uses quality replacement parts. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
police officer.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this the repair professional, and insist on
Give only the necessary information section. Genuine GM parts. Remember,
to police and other parties involved
If the airbag has inflated, see What if the vehicle is leased, you may
in the crash.
Will You See after an Airbag be obligated to have the vehicle
For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 3‑24. repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Roadside Assistance Program on even if your insurance coverage
page 13‑6. Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost.
Repair Process
Gather the following information: If another party's insurance
In the event that the vehicle requires company is paying for the repairs,
. Driver name, address, and damage repairs, GM recommends
telephone number. you are not obligated to accept a
that you take an active role in its repair valuation based on that
. Driver license number. repair. If you have a pre-determined insurance company's collision policy
. Owner name, address, and repair facility of choice, take the repair limits, as you have no
telephone number. vehicle there, or have it towed there. contractual limits with that company.
Specify to the facility that any In such cases, you can have control
. Vehicle license plate number. required replacement collision parts of the repair and parts choices as
. Vehicle make, model, and be original equipment parts, either long as the cost stays within
model year. new Genuine GM parts or recycled reasonable limits.
Service Publications Owner Information Current and Past Models

Ordering Information Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
Service Manuals to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the ORDER TOLL FREE:
and repair information on the 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
steering, body, etc. For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover),
Service Bulletins Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
visit Helm, Inc. at:
Warranty Booklet.
Service Bulletins give additional www.helminc.com.
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Or write to:
needed to knowledgeably service $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees. Helm, Incorporated
General Motors cars and trucks.
P.O. Box 07130
Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
Detroit, MI 48207
to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only.
service of the vehicle. Prices are subject to change
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
without notice and without
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
incurring obligation. Allow ample
shipping fees.
time for delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in
U.S. funds. Make checks payable
in U.S. funds.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited.
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Call Transport Canada at
a crash or could cause injury or write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
You can also obtain other
notifying General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that will
information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
Chevrolet Customer For example, the vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The
Assistance Center computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 The EDR in this vehicle is designed
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: data to help your dealer technician
CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, . How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances special equipment is required, and
in which crashes and injuries occur. access to the vehicle or the EDR is If the vehicle is equipped with an
needed. In addition to the vehicle active OnStar system, that system
Important: EDR data is recorded may also record data in crash or
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the near crash‐like situations. The
crash situation occurs; no data is OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and the vehicle or the EDR.
in the OnStar glove box kit, at
crash location) is recorded. GM will not access this data or www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such as law share it with others except: with the www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
enforcement, could combine the consent of the vehicle owner or,
pressing the Q button and
EDR data with the type of if the vehicle is leased, with the
personally identifying data routinely consent of the lessee; in response speaking to an advisor.
acquired during a crash to an official request by police or
investigation. similar government office; as part of Navigation System
GM's defense of litigation through If the vehicle has a navigation
the discovery process; or, as system, use of the system may
required by law. Data that GM result in the storage of destinations,
collects or receives may also be addresses, telephone numbers, and
used for GM research needs or may other trip information. Refer to the
be made available to others for navigation manual for information on
research purposes, where a need is stored data and for deletion
shown and the data is not tied to a instructions.
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) Statement
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
as key fobs for remote door locking/ Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
personal information or link with any harmful interference.
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Automatic
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3
Accessories and
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-29
Add-On Electrical
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Alarm Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Shift Lock Control
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Antenna Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Airbag
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 B
Antilock Brake Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Airbag System
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
How Does an Airbag
Appearance Care Voltage and Charging
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Passenger Sensing
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-28
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-29
What Makes an Airbag
Assistance Program, Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-16
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
What Will You See after an
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
When Should an Airbag
Audio System Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-21
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
i-2 INDEX
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Carbon Monoxide Cleaning

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Cargo Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamps, Front Turn Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Signal, and Parking Cautions, Danger, and Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-34 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2 Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-31 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Check Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
C Ignition Compressor Kit, Tire
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-27 Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
California Child Restraints Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-45 Infants and Young Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Perchlorate Materials Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Coolant
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Lower Anchors and Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41 Engine Temperature
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Capacities and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-50 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
INDEX i-3
Courtesy Transportation Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 E

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Electrical Equipment,
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Door
Electrical System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Engine Compartment
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Fuses and Circuit
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Text Telephone (TTY) Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Instrument Panel Fuse
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Driver Information
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Customer Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Service Publications Driving
Engine
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12 Characteristics and
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Customer Satisfaction Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Check and Service Engine
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
D For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Coolant Temperature
Danger, Warnings, and Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cooling System Messages . . .5-30
Daytime Running Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
i-4 INDEX
Engine (cont.) F Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Filter,
Overheated Protection Filling a Portable Fuel
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-45
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-44
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-28 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20
Fluid
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13
Engine Oil Requirements, California . . . . .9-45
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Fuel Economy
Fog Lamps
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Fuses
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Engine Compartment
Front Fog Lamp
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Fuses and Circuit
Front Seats
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Instrument Panel Fuse
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
INDEX i-5
G H Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Gasoline Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Gauges Headlamps
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Engine Coolant Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 I
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Daytime Running Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-15, 9-18
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Ignition Transmission Lock
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Daytime Running Lamps Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-22 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Warning Lights and Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Infants and Young Children,
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
General Information High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Instrument Panel
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Heater Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Heating and Air
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3 J
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
i-6 INDEX
K LATCH System Lights (cont.)

Replacing Parts after a High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-31
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Keyless Entry
LATCH, Lower Anchors and Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Light Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16
L Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44 Lighting Traction Control System
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Lamps Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Lights Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-17
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Locks
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Antilock Brake System Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Headlamps, Front Turn Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Signal, and Parking Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Daytime Running Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20 for Children (LATCH
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
INDEX i-7
M Messages (cont.) N
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Maintenance Navigation
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Vehicle Data Recording
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Maintenance Schedule and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Recommended Fluids New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 O
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Object Detection System
Mirrors
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Automatic Dimming
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Messages Off-Road
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Battery Voltage and Oil
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Monitor System, Tire
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-30 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-33
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Operation, Infotainment
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Ordering
Object Detection System . . . . .5-32 Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32
i-8 INDEX
Outlets Phone R
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-29
Radio Frequency
Overheated Engine Power
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16
Protection Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Radios
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Overview, Infotainment Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5 Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
P Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Park Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Rearview Mirror
Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Power Steering Warning
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Pregnancy, Using Safety
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Recommended
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Privacy
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Brake and P (Park) Radio Frequency
Recommended Fluids and
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-27 Program
Records
Passenger Airbag Status Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Proposition 65 Warning,
Recreational Vehicle
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-26 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Perchlorate Materials Reduced Engine Power
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Personalization Reimbursement Program,
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
INDEX i-9
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof Seats

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Replacement Parts Running the Vehicle While Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-32 S Securing Child
Replacing LATCH System Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-50
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Security
Replacing Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-18 How to Wear Safety Belts Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Reporting Safety Defects Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Service
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-18 Accessories and
Restraints Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-17 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Safety Defects Reporting Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Retained Accessory Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16
Ride Control Systems U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Maintenance, General
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Roads Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Publications Ordering
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
i-10 INDEX
Service (cont.) Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-26 T

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Starting the Vehicle
Taillamps
Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Shift Lock Control Function Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14
Check, Automatic Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Shifting Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Tires
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Storage Areas
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Sidemarker Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Signals, Turn and Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Storing the Tire Sealant
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Spare Tire and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-72
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-52
Specifications and Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
StabiliTrak System
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-50
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
INDEX i-11
Tires (cont.) Traction U

Sealant and Compressor Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-37
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-42
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Control System (TCS)/
Uniform Tire Quality
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Terminology and Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Uniform Tire Quality Transmission
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Wheel Alignment and Tire Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 V
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Vehicle
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
When It Is Time for New Transportation Program, Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Identification
Towing Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-49 Turn and Lane-Change Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-48 Turn Signal Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-84 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
i-12 INDEX
Vehicle Care Wheels

Storing the Tire Sealant Alignment and Tire
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-72 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Vehicle Identification Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Service Parts Identification When It Is Time for New
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-40
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
W Windshield
Warning Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Winter
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-28
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Chevrolet Cruze 2012 Manual - en PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Chevrolet Cruze 2012 Manual - en PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart " : Charging System * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

In Brief Steering Wheel

A. Exterior Lamp Controls on H. Windshield Wiper/Washer on R. Steering Wheel Adjustment on

Z. Climate Control Systems on Initial Drive

AA. Passenger Airbag Status For more detailed information, refer

Door Locks Power Door Locks

Press o { to activate the safety

Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Seat Cushion Tilt Feature

Manual Front Seats

Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,

Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an To adjust a power driver seat,

Interior Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Reading Lamps Instrument Panel Illumination Exterior Lighting

; : Turns on the parking lamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer

Climate Controls G. Rear Window Defogger G. Rear Window Defogger

F. Driver and Passenger Heated Transmission Vehicle Features

The clock menu can be only be Satellite Radio

Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Overview) on $ / i : Press to silence the

Cruise Control *: Press to disengage cruise Driver Information

C. MENU: Press to display the Power Outlets Performance and

Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center Automatic Crash Response

OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

With an active OnStar subscription,

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

Keyless Unlocking Keyless Locking Lock Sensor

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Programming Transmitters to The Driver Information

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

2. Remove the battery cover by

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Safety Locks Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Remote Trunk Release If the engine is running, the doors

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Vehicle Security Disarming the System Immobilizer Operation

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

If the engine does not start and the Exterior Mirrors

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Vehicles with OnStar have three

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Windows Power Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

Express Window Operation If conditions prevent the window

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21